Home

WRF-NMM User`s Guide

1. 5 Goddard Chou and Suarez 1999 NASA Tech Memo 2011 7 FLG Gu et al 2011 JGR Fu and Liou 1992 JAS 2012 31 Held Suarez 2008 99 GFDL Fels and Schwarzkopf 1981 JGR 2004 ra_lw_ Scheme Cores tChem Microphysics Cloud Ozone GHG physics Interaction Fraction 1 RRTM ARWNMM QcQrQiQs 1 0 1 profile constant or Qg yearly GHG 3 CAM ARW Qc Qi Qs max rand lat month yearly CO2 overlap or yearly GHG 4 RRTMG ARW Chem Qc Qr Qi Qs max rand 1 profile constant or t NMM overlap or yearly GHG lat month 5 New ARW Qc QrQi Qs 1 0 5 profiles constant Goddard Qg 7 FLG ARW Qc QrQi Qs 1 0 5 profiles constant Qg 31 Held ARW none none none Suarez 99 GFDL ARW NMM Qc Qr Qi Qs_ max rand lat date constant overlap WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 10 Surface Layer sf_sfclay_physics a MMS similarity Based on Monin Obukhov with Carslon Boland viscous sub layer and standard similarity functions from look up tables sf_sfclay_physics 1 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM b Eta similarity Used in Eta model Based on Monin Obukhov with Zilitinkevich thermal roughness length and standard similarity functions from look up tables 2 This scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP c NCEP Global Forecasting System GFS scheme The Monin Obukhov similarity profile relationship is applied to obtain the surface stress and laten
2. was set to a prefix other than FILE gt 1s drwxr xr x 2 4096 arch rwxr xr x 1 1672 clean rwxr xr x 1 3510 compile rw r r 1 85973 compile output rwxr xr x 1 4257 configure rw r r 1 2486 configure wps rw r r 1 154946888 FILE 2008 03 24 12 rw r r 1 154946888 FILE 2008 03 24 18 SEWHEH SEA 1 1957004 geo_nmm d01 nc SENGO Ee l 4745324 geo_nmm d02 nc drwxr xr x 4 4096 geogrid WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 9 lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 geogrid exe gt geogrid src geogrid exe rw r r 1 11169 geogrid log lrwxrwxrwx 1 38 GRIBFILE AAA gt data gfs gfs_ 080324 12 00 lrwxrwxrwx 1 38 GRIBFILE AAB gt data gfs gfs 080324 12 06 rwxr xr x 1 1328 link grib csh drwxr xr x 3 4096 metgrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 metgrid exe gt metgrid src metgrid exe rw r r 1 1094 namelist wps rw r r 1 1987 namelist wps all_ options rw r r 1 1075 namelist wps global rw r sr 1 652 namelist wps nmm rwe ra re 1 4786 README drwxr xr x 4 4096 ungrib lrwxrwxrwx 1 21 ungrib exe gt ungrib src ungrib exe rw r r 1 1418 ungrib log rw r r 1 27787 ungrib output drwxr xr x 3 4096 util lrwxrwxrwx 1 33 Vtable gt ungrib Variable Tables Vtable GFS Step 3 Horizontally interpolating meteorological data with metgrid In the final step of running the WPS meteorological data extracted by ungrib are horizontally interpolated to the simulation grids defined by geogrid In ord
3. F os z dimension0012 12 z dimension0016 16 z dimension0024 24 variables char Times Time DateStrLen float PRES Time num_metgrid_ levels south_north west_east RES FieldType 104 RES MemoryOrder XYZ RES units RES description R R R woe RES stagger M RES sr x 1 ES sr y Do7 MC_WPS Time num_sm levels south_north west_east MC WPS FieldType 104 C WPS MemoryOrder XYZ C WPS units C WPS description MC WPS stagger M C C float woe IPS isr x 1 _WPS sr y 1 float STC_WPS Time num st levels south north west east STC WPS FieldType 104 STC WPS MemoryOrder XYZ STC_WPS units STC_WPS description STC_WPS stagger M STC_WPS sr x 1 STC_WPS sr y 1 float GHT Time num_metgrid_ levels south north west east NNNNNNNYD ce to ty td 3 oF ie Ss woe GHT FieldType 104 GHT MemoryOrder XYZ GHT units m GHT description Height GHT stagger M GHT sr x 1 GHT sr y 1 float SNOW Time south north west_east SNOW FieldType 104 SNOW MemoryOrder XY SNOW units kg m 2 SNOW description Water equivalent snow depth SNOW stagger M SNOW sr x 1 SNOW sr y 1 float SKINTEMP Time south north west east SKINTEMP FieldType 104 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 58 SKINT SKINT SKI
4. Column integrated rain TOTAL COLUMN RAIN 138 200 Column integrated snow TOTAL COLUMN SNOW 139 200 Column integrated total TOTAL COL 140 200 condensate CONDENSATE Helicity STORM REL HELICITY 190 106 U component storm motion U COMP STORM MOTION 196 106 V component storm motion V COMP STORM MOTION 197 106 Accumulated total precipitation ACM TOTAL PRECIP 61 1 Accumulated convective ACM CONVCTIVE 63 1 precipitation PRECIP Accumulated grid scale ACM GRD SCALE PRECIP 62 1 precipitation Accumulated snowfall ACM SNOWFALL 65 1 Accumulated total snow melt ACM SNOW TOTAL 99 1 MELT Precipitation type 4 types INSTANT PRECIP TYPE 140 1 instantaneous Precipitation rate instantaneous INSTANT PRECIP RATE 59 1 Composite radar reflectivity COMPOSITE RADAR 212 200 REFL Low level cloud fraction LOW CLOUD FRACTION 73 214 Mid level cloud fraction MID CLOUD FRACTION 74 224 High level cloud fraction HIGH CLOUD FRACTION 75 234 Total cloud fraction TOTAL CLD FRACTION 71 200 Time averaged total cloud AVG TOTAL CLD FRAC 71 200 fraction Time averaged stratospheric AVG STRAT CLD FRAC 213 200 cloud fraction Time averaged convective cloud AVG CNVCT CLD FRAC 12 200 fraction Cloud bottom pressure CLOUD BOT PRESSURE 1 2 Cloud top pressure CLOUD TOP PRESSURE 1 3 Cloud bottom height CLOUD BOTTOM 7 2 above MSL HEIGHT Cloud top height CLOUD TOP HEIGHT 7 3 above MSL Convective cloud bottom pressure
5. float LANDMASK Time south north west east LANDMASK FieldType 104 LANDMASK MemoryOrder XY LANDMASK units none LANDMASK description Landmask l land O water LANDMASK stagger M LANDMASK sr_ x 1 LANDMASK sr_y 1 float F Time south north west east F FieldType 104 F MemoryOrder XY F units F description Coriolis F parameter F stagger M F sr x suin F sr y 1 float E Time south north west east WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 65 E FieldType 104 E MemoryOrder XY E units E description Coriolis E parameter E stagger M Ersr x 1 3 Esr y I float XLONG V Time south north west east LONG V FieldType 104 LONG V MemoryOrder XY LONG V units degrees longitude LONG V description Longitude on velocity grid LONG V stagger V LONG V sr x 1 LONG V sr y 1 float LAT V Time south_north west east V FieldType 104 LAT V MemoryOrder XY LAT V units degrees latitude LAT V description Latitude on velocity grid LAT V stagger V LAT V sr x 1 LAT V sr y 1 O K D D ke a DA DG DA DA DG DA DG ba DG ODG DG DG DG DG ODG ee a ee float XLONG M Time south north west east LONG M FieldType 104 LONG M MemoryOrder XY LONG M units degrees longitude LONG M description Longitude on mass grid
6. MMINLU USGS NUM_LAND CAT 24 ISWATER 16 ISLAKE 1 sISICE 24 ISURBAN 1 ISOILWATER 14 sgrid ad 1 7 parent id 1 i parent start j parent start i patent end 19 j parent _end 39 e 76 11986f parent grid ratio 1 sr x 1 3 isr y 1 NUM_METGRID SOIL LEVELS LAG METGRID 1 LAG PSFC 1 LAG SM000010 1 LAG SM010040 1 LAG SM040100 1 M100200 1 LAG ST000010 1 LAG ST010040 1 LAG ST040100 1 LAG ST100200 1 LAG SOILHGT 1 Ks i D A n WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3731068 f 37 29281f 37 31068 26 37742 76 89354f ety ay 3 67 User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 4 WRF NMM Initialization Table of Contents e Introduction e Initialization for Real Data Cases e Running real_nmm exe Introduction The real_nmm exe portion of the code generates initial and boundary conditions for the WRF NMM model wrf exe that are derived from output files provided by the WPS Inputs required for the WRF NMM model are not restricted to WPS alone Several variables are defined re defined using the real_nmm part of the routines For instance the WRF NMM core uses the definition of the Coriolis parameter in real_nmm rather than that in WPS The real_nmm program performs the following tasks Reads data
7. Makefile Top level makefile README General information about WRF code README DA General information about WRFDA code README 1io_config IO stream information README NMM NMM specific information README rsl_output Explanation of the another rsl output option README SSIB Information about coupling WRF ARW with SSiB README test_cases Directions for running test cases and a listing of cases README windturbine Describes wind turbine drag parameterization schemes Registry Directory for WRF Registry file arch Directory where compile options are gathered chem Directory for WRF Chem clean Script to clean created files and executables compile Script for compiling WRF code configure Script to configure the configure wrf file for compile dyn_em Directory for WRF ARW dynamic modules dyn_exp Directory for a toy dynamic core dyn_nmm Directory for WRF NMM dynamic modules external Directory that contains external packages such as those for IO time keeping ocean coupling interface and MPI frame Directory that contains modules for WRF framework WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 6 inc Directory that contains include files main Directory for main routines such as wrf F and all executables phys Directory for all physics modules run Directory where one may run WRF share Directory that contains mostly modules for WRF mediation layer and WRF I O test Directory containing sub directories where o
8. SOUTH NORTH_PATCH_START_STAG 1 SOUTH NORTH_PATCH_END_STAG 40 BOTTOM TOP_PATCH_START_UNSTAG 1 BOTTOM TOP_PATCH_END_UNSTAG 27 BOTTOM TOP_PATCH_START_STAG 1 BOTTOM TOP_PATCH_END_STAG 28 DX 0 289143f DY 0 287764f DT 90 f WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 54 gt CEN_LAT 32 f gt CEN_LON 83 f TRUELATI 1 e 20f TRUELAT2 1 e 20f MOAD_CEN_LAT 0 f STAND_LON 1 e 20f GMT 0 f JULYR 2008 SJULDAY 11 MAP_PROJ 203 MMINLU USGS NUM_LAND _ CAT 24 ISWATER 16 ISLAKE 1 ISICE 24 ISURBAN 1 ISOILWATER 14 LPARENT_START 1 J_LPARENT_START 1 Extended Reference List for WRF NMM Dynamics and Physics Arakawa A and W H Schubert 1974 Interaction of a cumulus cloud ensemble with the large scale environment Part I J Atmos Sci 31 674 701 Chen F Z Janjic and K Mitchell 1997 Impact of atmospheric surface layer parameterization in the new land surface scheme of the NCEP mesoscale Eta model Boundary Layer Meteorology 48 Chen S H and W Y Sun 2002 A one dimensional time dependent cloud model J Meteor Soc Japan 80 99 118 Chen F and J Dudhia 2001 Coupling an advanced land surface hydrology model with the Penn State NCAR MM5 modeling system Part I Model description and implementation Mon Wea Rev 129 569 585 Chou M D and M J Suarez 1994 An efficient thermal inf
9. 2deg Ideg 30m 20m and 10m respectively To select the resolution to interpolate from the user should prefix the resolution specified for the geog_data_res variable in the geogrid namelist record by the string XX X where XXX is one of the five available resolutions of GWDO static data For example in a model configuration with a 48 km grid spacing the geog_data_res variable might typically be specified as geog data_res 10m However if the GWDO scheme were employed the finest resolution of GWDO static data that is still lower in resolution than the model grid would be the 30 minute data in which case the user should specify geog data_res 30m 10m If none of 2deg Ideg 30m or 20m are specified in combination with other resolutions of static data in the geog_data_res variable the 10m GWDO static data will be used since it is also designated as the default resolution in the GEOGRID TBL file It is worth noting that if 10 minute resolution GWDO data are to be used but a different resolution is desired for other static fields e g topography height the user should simply omit 10m from the value given to the geog_data_res variable since specifying WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 16 geog data_res 10m 30s for example would cause geogrid to use the 10 mintute data in preference to the 30 second data for the non GWDO fields
10. Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with pgcc SGI MPT dmpar Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with pgcec SGI MPT dm sm Linux x86_64 PGI accelerator compiler with gcc serial 10 Linux x86_64 PGI accelerator compiler with gcc smpar 11 Linux x86_64 PGI accelerator compiler with gcc dmpar 12 Linux x86_64 PGI accelerator compiler with gcc dm sm 13 Linux x86_64 1486 i586 1686 ifort compiler with icc serial OMANNDMAHWNE WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 7 14 Linux x86_64 1486 1586 1686 ifort compiler with icc smpar 15 Linux x86_64 1486 1586 1686 ifort compiler with icc dmpar 16 Linux x86_64 1486 i586 1686 ifort compiler with icc dm sm 17 Linux x86_64 1486 i586 1686 ifort compiler with icc SGI MPT serial 18 Linux x86_64 1486 i586 1686 ifort compiler with icc SGI MPT smpar 19 Linux x86_64 1486 1586 1686 ifort compiler with icc SGI MPT dmpar 20 Linux x86_64 1486 i586 1686 ifort compiler with icc SGI MPT dm sm For WRF NMM V3 on LINUX operating systems option 3 is recommended Note For WRF NMM it is recommended at this time to compile either serial or utilizing distributed memory DM Once an option is selected a choice of what type of nesting is desired no nesting 0 basic 1 pre set moves 2 or vortex following 3 will be given For WRF NMM only no nesting or basic nesting is available at this time unless the environment setting HWRF is set then 3 will be automatically selected whic
11. MemoryOrder XYZ units fraction description Monthly green fraction stagger M sr x 1 sr y 1 Time z dimension0012 south north west east Tal DO FieldType 104 DO1 ALB 2 ALBE 2M MemoryOrder XYZ ALBEDO12M units percent ALBEDO12M description Monthly surface albedo ALBEDO12M stagger M ALBEDO12M sr x 1 ALBEDO12M sr_y 1 float SOILCBOT Time z dimension0016 south north west east SOILCBOT FieldType 104 SOILCBOT MemoryOrder XYZ SOILCBOT units category SOILCBOT description l6 category top layer soil type SOILCBOT stagger M SOILCBOT sr x 1 SOILCBOT sr y 1 float SOILCTOP Time z dimension0016 south north west east SOILCTOP SOILCTOP SOILCTOP SOILCTOP SOILCTOP SOILCTOP SOILCTOP FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XYZ units category description l6 category top layer soil type stagger M Sr x Sb sr y 1 float SOILTEMP Time south north west _east SOILTEM FieldType 104 SOILT SOILT W MemoryOrder XY A units Kelvin SOILTE SOILT SOILT SOILTEMP temperature WRF NMM V3 User s Guide description Annual mean deep soil stagger M sr x i r sr oy 3 62 float HGT V Time south north west east HGT V H
12. NARR_3D After running ungrib exe the following files should exist with a suitable substitution for the appropriate dates NARR_3D 2008 08 16 12 NARR_3D 2008 08 16 15 NARR_3D 2008 08 16 18 Given intermediate files for the 3 dimensional fields we may process the surface fields by linking the surface GRIB files and changing the prefix variable in the namelist amp ungrib out_format WPS prefix NARR_SFC Again running ungrib exe the following should exist in addition to the NARR_3D files NARR_SFC 2008 08 16 12 NARR_SFC 2008 08 16 15 NARR_SFC 2008 08 16 18 Finally the fixed file is linked with the Link_grib csh script and the prefix variable in the namelist is again set amp ungrib out_format WPS prefix NARR_FIXED Having run ungrib exe for the third time the fixed fields should be available in addition to the surface and 3D fields NARR_FIXED 1979 11 08 00 For the sake of clarity the fixed file may be renamed to remove any date information for example by renaming it to simply NARR_FIXED since the fields in the file are static In this example we note that the NARR fixed data are only available at a specific time WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 18 1979 November 08 at 0000 UTC and thus the user would need to set the correct starting and ending time for the data in the share namelist record before running ungrib on the NARR fixed file of course the times should b
13. NMM Version 3 Modeling System User s Guide April 2014 WRF NMM FLOW CHART WEATHER RESEARCH amp FORECASTING Developmental Testbed Center National Centers for Environmental Prediction Foreword The Weather Research and Forecast WRF model system has two dynamic cores 1 The Advanced Research WRF ARW developed by NCAR MMM 2 The Non hydrostatic Mesoscale Model NMM developed by NOAA NCEP The WRF NMM User s Guide covers NMM specific information as well as the common parts between the two dynamical cores of the WRF package This document is a comprehensive guide for users of the WRF NMM Modeling System Version 3 The WRF NMM User s Guide will be continuously enhanced and updated with new versions of the WRF code Please send questions to wrfhelp ucar edu Contributors to this guide Zavisa Janjic NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Tom Black NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Matt Pyle NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Brad Ferrier NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Hui Ya Chuang NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Dusan Jovic NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Nicole McKee NOAA NWS NCEP EMC Robert Rozumalski NOAA NWS FDTB John Michalakes NCAR MMM Dave Gill NCAR MMM Jimy Dudhia NCAR MMM Michael Duda NCAR MMM Meral Demirtas NCAR RAL Michelle Harrold NCAR RAL Louisa Nance NCAR RAL Tricia Slovacek NCAR RAL Jamie Wolff NCAR RAL Ligia Bernardet NOAA ESRL Paula McCaslin NOAA ESRL Mark Stoelinga University of Washington Acknowledgements Parts of this docume
14. XY LANDMASK units none LANDMASK description Landmask l land O water LANDMASK stagger M LANDMASK sr_ x 1 LANDMASK sr_y 1 LANDUSEF Time land cat south _north west_east AANDUSEF FieldType 104 AANDUSEF MemoryOrder XYZ ANDUSEF units category ANDUSEF description 24 category USGS landuse AANDUSEF stagger M AANDUSEF sr x 1 AANDUSEF sr_ y 1 LU INDEX Time south_north west_east User s Guide 3 53 float float float float float float float U_INDEX FieldType 104 U_INDEX MemoryOrder XY U_INDEX units category U_INDEX description Dominant category UU_INDEX stagger M U INDEX sr x 1 U_INDEX sr y 1 HCNVX Time south _north west_east HCNVX FieldType 104 HCNVX MemoryOrder XY HCNVX units whoknows HCNVX description something HCNVX stagger M HCNVX sr x 1 HCNVX sr_ y 1 HSTDV Time south _north west_east HSTDV FieldType 104 HSTDV MemoryOrder XY HSTDV units whoknows HSTDV description something HSTDV stagger M HSTDV sr_ x 1 HSTDV sr_y 1 HASYW HASYW HASYW HASYW HASYW HASYW HASYW HASYS HASYS HASYS HASYS HASYS HASYS HASYS HASYW Time south _north west_east FieldType 104 MemoryOrd
15. relative to earth FALSE character len 8 startloc Which point in array is given by startlat startlon set either to SWCORNER or CENTER 7 character len 9 field Name of the field character len 24 hdate Valid date for data YYYY MM DD_HH 00 00 character len 25 units Units of data character len 32 map source Source model originating center character len 46 desc Short description of data 1 WRITE FORMAT VERSION write unit ounit version 2 WRITE METADATA Cylindrical equidistant if iproj 0 then write unit ounit hdate xfcst map_source field amp units desc xlvl nx ny iproj write unit ounit startloc startlat startlon amp deltalat deltalon earth_radius Mercator else if iproj 1 then write unit ounit hdate xfcst map_source field amp units desc xlvl nx ny iproj write unit ounit startloc startlat startlon dx dy amp truelatl earth_radius Lambert conformal else if iproj 3 then write unit ounit hdate xfcst map_source field amp units desc xlvl nx ny iproj write unit ounit startloc startlat startlon dx dy amp xlonc truelatl truelat2 earth_radius Gaussian else if iproj 4 then write unit ounit hdate xfcst map_source field amp units desc xlvl nx ny iproj write unit ounit startloc startlat startlon amp nlats deltalon earth radius Polar stereographic else if iproj 5 then write unit ounit hdate xfcst
16. Detailed and comprehensive documentation aimed at WRF software is available at http www mmm ucar edu wrf WG2 software_2 0 Performance Benchmark information is available at http Avww mmm ucar edu wrf bench WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 15 User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 7 Post Processing Utilities Table of Contents NCEP Unified Post Processor UPP e UPP Introduction UPP Required Software Obtaining the UPP Code UPP Directory Structure Installing the UPP Code UPP Functionalities Setting up the WRF model to interface with UPP UPP Control File Overview o Controlling which variables unipost outputs o Controlling which levels unipost outputs e Running UPP o Overview of the scripts to run UPP e Visualization with UPP o GEMPAK o GrADS e Fields Produced by unipost RIP4 RIP Introduction RIP Software Requirements RIP Environment Settings Obtaining the RIP Code RIP Directory Structure Installing the RIP Code RIP Functionalities RIP Data Preparation RIPDP o RIPDP Namelist o Running RIPDP e RIP User Input File UIF e Running RIP o Calculating and Plotting Trajectories with RIP o Creating Vis5D Datasets with RIP WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 1 NCEP Unified Post Processor UPP UPP Introduction The NCEP Unified Post Processor has replaced the WRF Post Processor WPP Th
17. Installing the UPP Code UPP uses a build mechanism similar to that used by the WRF model There are two environment variables which must be set before beginning the installation a variable to define the path to a similarly compiled version of WRF and a variable to a compatible version of netCDF If the environment variable WRF_DIR is set by for example setenv WRF_DIR home user WRF V3 this path will be used to reference WRF libraries and modules Otherwise the path WRFV3 will be used WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 4 In the case neither method is set the configure script will automatically prompt you for a pathname To reference the netCDF libraries the configure script checks for an environment variable VETCDF first then the system default user local netcdf and then a user supplied link netcdf_links If none of these resolve a path the user will be prompted by the configure script to supply a path If WRF was compiled with the environment variable setenv HWRF 1 This must also be set when compiling UPP Type configure and provide the required info For example configure You will be given a list of choices for your computer Choices for LINUX operating systems are as follows 1 Linux x86_64 PGI compiler serial Linux x86_64 PGI compiler dmpar Linux x86_64 Intel compiler serial Linux x86_64 Intel compiler dmpar Linux x86_64 Intel compiler SGI MPT serial Linux x86_64 Intel comp
18. The argument model data set name can be any string you choose that uniquely defines the model output data set It will be used in the file names of all the new RIP data files that are created The basic option causes ripdp_wrfnmm to process only the basic variables that RIP requires whereas all causes ripdp_wrfnmm to process all variables encountered in the model output file It produces files for those variables using the variable name provided in the model output to create the file name If all is specified the discard variable can be used in the RIPDP namelist to prevent processing of unwanted variables However if basic is specified the user can request particular other fields besides the basic fields to be processed by setting a retain variable in the RIPDP namelist Finally data file 1 data file 2 are the path names either full or relative to the current working directory of the model data set files in chronological order If model output WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 38 exists for nested domains RIPDP must be run for each domain separately and each run must be given a new model data set name When the program is finished a large number of files will have been created that will reside in the current working directory This is the data that will be accessed by RIP to produce plots See Appendix C in the full RIP user s guide for a description of how these files are named and the format of their contents RIP User I
19. The model coarse domain and any nested domains are defined in the geogrid namelist record of the namelist wps file and additionally parameters in the share namelist record need to be set An example of these two namelist records is given below and the user is referred to the description of namelist variables for more information on the purpose and possible values of each variable amp share wrf core NMM max dom 2 start_date 2008 03 24 12 00 00 2008 03 24 12 00 00 end_date 2008 03 24 18 00 00 2008 03 24 12 00 00 interval seconds 21600 io form _geogrid 2 amp geogrid parent_id Ty Ty parent _grid_ratio Ly 3y i_parent_start Ip Silly j_parent_start dip 17 e we 74 112 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 5 e sn 61 Only geog data_res 10m 2m dx 0 289153 dy 0 287764 map_proj rotated_11 ref lat 34 83 ref lon 81 03 geog_data_path mmm users wrfhelp WPS_GEOG To summarize a set of typical changes to the share namelist record relevant to geogrid the WRF dynamical core must first be selected with wrf_core If WPS is being run for an ARW simulation wrf core should be set to arw and if running for an NMM simulation it should be set to nmm After selecting the dynamical core the total number of domains in the case of ARW or nesting levels in the case of NMM must be chosen with max_dom Since geogrid produces only time indep
20. Writing Meteorological Data to the Intermediate Format Creating and Editing Vtables Writing Static Data to the Geogrid Binary Format Description of Namelist Variables Description of GEOGRID TBL Options Description of index Options Description of METGRID TBL Options Available Interpolation Options in Geogrid and Metgrid Land Use and Soil Categories in the Static Data WPS Output Fields Introduction The WRF Preprocessing System WPS is a set of three programs whose collective role is to prepare input to the real program for real data simulations Each of the programs performs one stage of the preparation geogrid defines model domains and interpolates static geographical data to the grids ungrib extracts meteorological fields from GRIB formatted files and metgrid horizontally interpolates the meteorological fields extracted WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 1 by ungrib to the model grids defined by geogrid The work of vertically interpolating meteorological fields to WRF eta levels is performed within the real program External Data Sources Static d Geographical Data Gridded Data NAM GFS Cirer Y RUC AGRMET WRF Preprocessing System The data flow between the programs of the WPS is shown in the figure above Each of the WPS programs reads parameters from a common namelist file as shown in the figure This namelist file has separate namelist records for eac
21. halo HALO_NMM_K dyn_nmm lt Stencil varlist gt 8 92 24 1 U V g W Z The keyword is halo The communication is named in the lt CommName gt column so that it can be referenced in the source code The entry in the lt CommName gt column is case sensitive the convention is to start the name with HALO_NMM The selected dynamical core is defined in the lt Core gt column There is no ambiguity as every communication in each Registry file will have the exact same lt Core gt column option The last set of information is the lt Stencil varlist gt The portion in front of the is the stencil size and the comma separated list afterwards defines the variables that are communicated with that stencil size Different stencil sizes are available and are separated in the same lt Stencil varlist gt column The stencil sizes 8 24 48 all refer to a square with an odd number of grid cells on a side with the center grid cell removed 8 3x3 1 24 5x5 1 48 7x7 1 The special small stencil 4 is just a simple north south east west communication pattern The convention in the WRF model is to provide a communication immediately after a variable has been updated The communications are restricted to the mediation layer an intermediate layer of the software that is placed between the framework level and the model level The model level is where developers spend most of their time The majority of users will insert communications
22. q Thompson aerosol aware 28 This scheme considers water and ice friendly aerosols A climatology dataset may be used to specify initial and boundary conditions for the aerosol variables Thompson and Eidhammer 2014 JAS New in Version 3 6 r HUJI Hebrew University of Jerusalem Israel spectral bin microphysics full 32 and fast 30 versions are available since Version 3 6 Summary of Microphysics Options mp_physics Scheme Reference ae 1 Kessler Kessler 1969 2000 2 Lin Purdue Lin Farley and Orville 1983 JCAM 2000 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 4 WSM3 4 WSM5 5 Eta Ferrier 6 WSM6 7 Goddard 8 Thompson 9 Milbrandt 2 mom 10 Morrison 2 mom 13 SBU YLin 14 WDMS5 16 WDM6 17 NSSL 2 mom 18 NSSL 2 mom w CCN prediction 19 NSSL 1 mom 21 NSSL 1 momlfo 28 Thompson aerosol aware 30 HUJI SBM fast 32 HUJI SBM full 85 Eta HWRF 95 Eta coarse Hong Dudhia and Chen 2004 MWR Hong Dudhia and Chen 2004 MWR Rogers Black Ferrier Lin Parrish and DiMego 2001 web doc Hong and Lim 2006 JKMS Tao Simpson and McCumber 1989 MWR Thompson Field Rasmussen and Hall 2008 MWR Milbrandt and Yau 2005 JAS Morrison Thompson and Tatarskii 2009 MWR Lin and Colle 2011 MWR Lim and Hong 2010 Lim and Hong 2010 Mansell Ziegler and Brunning 2010 Mansell Ziegler and Brunning 2010 Thompson and Eidhammer 2014 JAS Khain et al 2010 JAS K
23. zktraj values are potential temperature values in K e zktraj values are equivalent potential temperature values in K ihydrometeor If flag 1 trajectory calculation algorithm uses the hydrometeor fall speed instead of the vertical air velocity xjtraj yitraj x and y values in grid points of the initial positions of the trajectories zktraj Vertical location of the initial points of the trajectories It is also possible to define a 3D array of trajectory initial points without having to specify the x y z locations of every point The grid can be of arbitrary horizontal orientation To define the grid you must specify the first seven values of xjtraj as follows The first two values should be the x and y values of the lower left corner of the trajectory horizontal grid The next two values should be the x and y values of another point defining the positive x axis of the trajectory grid i e the positive x axis will point from the corner point to this point The fifth value should be the trajectory grid spacing in model grid lengths The final two values should be the number of points in the x and y directions of the trajectory horizontal grid The first value of xjtraj should be negative indicating that a grid is to be defined rather than just individual points but the absolute value of that value will be used Any yitraj values given are ignored The zktraj values specify the vertical levels of the 3D grid
24. 1 Field capacity FIELD CAPACITY 220 1 ICAO height at maximum wind ICAO HGHT MAX WIND 5 6 level ICAO height at tropopause ICAO HGHT AT TROP 5 7 Radar echo top RADAR ECHO TOP 240 200 Time averaged surface Visible AVE IN SEC VIS SW BE 166 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 29 beam downward solar flux Time averaged surface Visible AVE IN SFC VIS SW DF 167 1 diffuse downward solar flux Time averaged surface Near IR AVE IN SFC IR SW BE 168 1 beam downward solar flux Time averaged surface Near IR AVE IN SFC IR SW DF 169 1 diffuse downward solar flux Average snowfall rate AVE SNOWFALL RATE 64 1 Dust 1 on pressure surface DUST 1 ON P SFCS 240 100 Dust 2 on pressure surface DUST 2 ON P SFCS 241 100 Dust 3 on pressure surface DUST 3 ON P SFCS 242 100 Dust 4 on pressure surface DUST 4 ON P SFCS 243 100 Dust 5 on pressure surface DUST 5 ON P SFCS 244 100 Equilibrium level height EQUIL LEVEL HEIGHT 7 247 Lightning LIGHTNING 187 1 Goes west channel 2 brightness GOES W TB CH 2 241 8 temperature Goes west channel 3 brightness GOES W TB CH 3 242 8 temperature Goes west channel 4 brightness GOES W TB CH 4 243 8 temperature Goes west channel 5 brightness GOES W TB CH 5 244 8 temperature In flight icing from NCAR s NCAR IN FLIGHT ICING 168 100 algorithm Specific humidity at flight levels SPE HUM AT FD HEIGHT 51
25. 30 mb mean Precipitable water in boundary P WATER IN BNDRY LYR 54 116 layer 30 mb mean U wind in boundary layer U WIND IN BNDRY LYR 33 116 30 mb mean V wind in boundary layer V WIND IN BNDRY LYR 30 mb mean 34 116 Omega in boundary layer OMEGA IN BNDRY LYR 39 116 30 mb mean Visibility VISIBILITY 20 1 Vegetation type VEGETATION TYPE 225 1 Soil type SOIL TYPE 224 1 Canopy conductance CANOPY 181 1 CONDUCTANCE PBL height PBL HEIGHT 221 1 Slope type SLOPE TYPE 222 1 Snow depth SNOW DEPTH 66 l Liquid soil moisture LIQUID SOIL MOISTURE 160 112 Snow free albedo SNOW FREE ALBEDO 170 1 Maximum snow albedo MAXIMUM SNOW 159 1 ALBEDO Canopy water evaporation CANOPY WATER EVAP 200 1 Direct soil evaporation DIRECT SOIL EVAP 199 1 Plant transpiration PLANT TRANSPIRATION 210 1 Snow sublimation SNOW SUBLIMATION 198 1 Air dry soil moisture AIR DRY SOIL MOIST 231 1 Soil moist porosity SOIL MOIST POROSITY 240 1 Minimum stomatal resistance MIN STOMATAL RESIST 203 1 Number of root layers NO OF ROOT LAYERS 171 1 Soil moist wilting point SOIL MOIST WILT PT 219 1 Soil moist reference SOIL MOIST REFERENCE 230 1 Canopy conductance solar CANOPY COND SOLAR 246 1 component Canopy conductance CANOPY COND TEMP 247 1 temperature component Canopy conductance humidity CANOPY COND HUMID 248 1 component Canopy conductance soil CANOPY COND SOILM 249 1 component Potential evaporation POTENTIAL EVAP 145 1 Heat diffusivity on
26. 90 541 550 Schwarzkopf M D and S B Fels 1991 The simplified exchange method revisited An accurate rapid method for computations of infrared cooling rates and fluxes J Geophys Res 96 9075 9096 Skamarock W C J B Klemp J Dudhia D O Gill D M Barker W Wang and J G Powers 2005 A Description of the Advanced Research WRF Version 2 NCAR Tech Note NCAR TN 468 4STR 88 pp Available from UCAR Communications P O Box 3000 Boulder CO 80307 Available on line at http box mmm ucar edu wrf users docs arw_v2 pdf Smirnova T G J M Brown and S G Benjamin 1997 Performance of different soil model configurations in simulating ground surface temperature and surface fluxes Mon Wea Rev 125 1870 1884 Smirnova T G J M Brown S G Benjamin and D Kim 2000 Parameterization of cold season processes in the MAPS land surface scheme J Geophys Res 105 D3 4077 4086 Tao W K J Simpson and M McCumber 1989 An ice water saturation adjustment Mon Wea Rev 117 231 235 Troen I and L Mahrt 1986 A simple model of the atmospheric boundary layer Sensitivity to surface evaporation Boundary Layer Meteor 37 129 148 Thompson G R M Rasmussen and K Manning 2004 Explicit forecasts of winter precipitation using an improved bulk microphysics scheme Part I Description and sensitivity analysis Mon Wea Rev 132 519 542 Wicker L J and R B Wilhelmson 1995 Simul
27. CONV CLOUD BOT 1 242 PRESS Convective cloud top pressure CONV CLOUD TOP 1 243 PRESS Shallow convective cloud bottom SHAL CU CLD BOT PRES 1 248 pressure Shallow convective cloud top SHAL CU CLD TOP PRES 1 249 pressure WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 20 Deep convective cloud bottom DEEP CU CLD BOT PRES 1 251 pressure Deep convective cloud top DEEP CU CLD TOP PRES 1 252 pressure Grid scale cloud bottom pressure GRID CLOUD BOT PRESS 1 206 Grid scale cloud top pressure GRID CLOUD TOP PRESS 1 207 Convective cloud fraction CONV CLOUD FRACTION 72 200 Convective cloud efficiency CU CLOUD EFFICIENCY 134 200 Above ground height of LCL LCL AGL HEIGHT 7 5 Pressure of LCL LCL PRESSURE 1 5 Cloud top temperature CLOUD TOP TEMPS 11 3 Temperature tendency from RADFLX CNVG TMP 216 109 radiative fluxes TNDY Temperature tendency from SW RAD TEMP TNDY 250 109 shortwave radiative flux Temperature tendency from LW RAD TEMP TNDY 251 109 longwave radiative flux Outgoing surface shortwave INSTN OUT SFC SW RAD 211 1 radiation instantaneous Outgoing surface longwave INSTN OUT SFC LW RAD 212 1 radiation instantaneous Incoming surface shortwave AVE INCMG SFC SW RAD 204 1 radiation time averaged Incoming surface longwave AVE INCMG SFC LW RAD 205 1 radiation time averaged Outgoing surface shortwave AVE OUTG
28. Janjic 1996a 1996b 2002a 2002b The lateral diffusion is formulated following the Smagorinsky non linear approach Janjic 1990 The control parameter for the lateral diffusion is the square of Smagorinsky constant Divergence damping The horizontal component of divergence is damped Sadourny 1975 In addition if applied the technique for coupling the elementary subgrids of the E grid Janjic 1979 damps the divergent part of flow Physics Options WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 2 WRE offers multiple physics options that can be combined in many ways The options typically range from simple and efficient to sophisticated and more computationally costly and from newly developed schemes to well tried schemes such as those in current operational models All available WRF System physics package options available in WRF Version 3 are listed below Some of these options have not yet been tested for WRF NMM Indication of the options that have been tested as well as the level of the testing is included in the discussion below It is recommended that the same physics be used in all grids coarsest and nests The only exception is that the cumulus parameterization may be activated on coarser grids and turned off on finer grids Microphysics mp_physics a Kessler scheme A warm rain i e no ice scheme used commonly in idealized cloud modeling studies mp_physics 1 b Lin et al scheme A sophisticated scheme that has ice snow
29. LONG M stagger M LONG M sr x 1 LONG M sr y 1 float XLAT M Time south north west east LAT M FieldType 104 LAT M MemoryOrder XY LAT M units degrees latitude LAT M description Latitude on mass grid LAT M stagger M LAT Misr x 1 LAT M sr y 1 global attributes TITLE OUTPUT FROM METGRID V3 4 SIMULATION START D 2008 01 11 00 00 00 WEST EAST GRID DI ION 19 SOUTH NORTH _ GRID D NSION 39 BOTTOM TOP GRID DIMENSION 27 WEST EAST PATC RT UNSTAG 1 WEST EAST PATC UNSTAG 19 WEST EAST PATC STAG 1 WEST EAST PATCH END STAG 19 SOUTH NORTH PATCH START UNSTAG 1 SOUTH NORTH PATCH END UNSTAG 393 SOUTH NORTH PATCH START STAG 1 SOUTH NORTH PATCH END STAG 39 4 Zw m ve HJ H H H H r WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 66 GRIDTYPE EK DX 0 289143f DY 0 287764f DYN OPT 4 i r r CEN_LAT 32 f CEN LON 83 f TRUELATI 1 e 20f TRUELAT2 1 e 20f MOAD CEN LAT 0 f STAND LON 1 e 20f POLE LAT 90 f POLE LON Oot r corner lats 26 393295 26 39329f 26 40831f 37 3276f Ont Os ty Ost 06k ORE 7 r corner lons 88 78565f 77 21435f 88 46474f 89 1577 Oyf Osy OVE Oleg Os Ey VOE MAP_PROJ 203
30. No default value 6 DX A real value giving the grid spacing in the x direction of the data set If projection is one of lambert polar mercator albers_nad83 Of polar _wgs84 dx gives the grid spacing in meters if projection iS regular_11 dx gives the grid spacing in degrees No default value 7 DY A real value giving the grid spacing in the y direction of the data set If projection is one of lambert polar mercator albers_nad83 Or polar _wgs84 dy WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 42 gives the grid spacing in meters if projection 1S regular_11 dy gives the grid spacing in degrees No default value 8 KNOWN_X A real value specifying the i coordinate of an i j location corresponding to a latitude longitude location that is known in the projection Default value is 1 9 KNOWN_Y A real value specifying the j coordinate of an i j location corresponding to a latitude longitude location that is known in the projection Default value is 1 10 KNOWN_LAT A real value specifying the latitude of a latitude longitude location that is known in the projection No default value 11 KNOWN_LON A real value specifying the longitude of a latitude longitude location that is known in the projection No default value 12 STDLON A real value specifying the longitude that is parallel with the y axis in conic and azimuthal projections No default value 13 TRUELAT1 A real value specifying the first true latitude for
31. a utility called ndate is distributed with the Unified Post Processor tarfile This utility is used to format the dates of the forecasts to be posted for ingestion by the codes Setting up the WRF model to interface with UPP The unipost program is currently set up to read a large number of fields from the WRF model history files This configuration stems from NCEP s need to generate all of its required operational products A list of the fields that are currently read in by unipost is provided for the WRF NMM in Table 1 and WRF ARW in Table 2 Tables for the GFS and CFS fields will be added in the future When using the netCDF or mpi binary read this program is configured such that it will run successfully even if an expected input field is missing from the WRF history file as long as this field is not required to produce a requested output field If the pre requisites for a requested output field are missing from the WRF history file unipost will abort at run time Take care not to remove fields from the wrfout files which may be needed for diagnostic purposes by the UPP package For example if isobaric state fields are requested but the pressure fields on model interfaces PINT for WRF NMM P and PB for WRF ARW are not available in the history file unipost will abort at run time In general the default fields available in the wrfout files are sufficient to run UPP The fields written to the WRE history file are controlled by the settings in
32. atmosphere interaction processes 4 Noah MP contains a separate vegetation canopy WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 12 defined by a canopy top and bottom with leaf physical and radiometric properties used in a two stream canopy radiation transfer scheme that includes shading effects Noah MP contains a multi layer snow pack with liquid water storage and melt refreeze capability and a snow interception model describing loading unloading melt refreeze and sublimation of the canopy intercepted snow Multiple options are available for surface water infiltration and runoff and groundwater transfer and storage including water table depth to an unconfined aquifer Horizontal and vertical vegetation density can be prescribed or predicted using prognostic photosynthesis and dynamic vegetation models that allocate carbon to vegetation leaf stem wood and root and soil carbon pools fast and slow New in Version 3 4 Niu et al 2011 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM g SSiB Land Surface Model This is the third generation of the Simplified Simple Biosphere Model Xue et al 1991 Sun and Xue 2001 SSiB is developed for land atmosphere interaction studies in the climate model The aerodynamic resistance values in SSiB are determined in terms of vegetation properties ground conditions and bulk Richardson number according to the modified Monin Obukhov similarity theory SSiB 3 includes three snow layers to realistically simulate
33. itrajcalc If flag 1 turns on trajectory calculation use amp trajcalc namelist as well imakevsd 0 If flag 1 generates output for VisSD rip_root dev null Over ride the path name specified in UNIX environment variable RIP_ROOT The second namelist in the UIF is called amp trajcalc This section is ignored by RIP if itrajcalc 0 Trajectory calculation mode and use of the amp trajcalc namelist are described in the Calculating and Plotting Trajectories with RIP section and in Chapter 6 of the full RIP User s Guide b The plot specification table The plot specification table PST provides user control over particular aspects of individual frames and overlays The basic structure of the PST is as follows The first line of the PST is a line of consecutive equal signs This line as well as the next two lines is WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 40 ignored they are simply a banner that indicates a PST Following that there are several groups of one or more lines separated by a full line of equal signs Each group of lines is a frame specification group FSG because it describes what will appear in a frame A frame is defined as one frame of metacode Each FSG must be ended with a full line of equal signs that is how RIP knows that it has reached the end of the FSG Actually RIP only looks for four consecutive equal signs but the equal signs are continued to the end of the line for cosmetic purposes Each
34. layer the layer When layer fields Level Type 112 are specified the starting and ending points for the layer have units that are dependent on the field itself appropriate values may be found with the glprint exe and g2print exe utility programs The second group of fields in a Vtable those that describe how the data are identified within the metgrid and real programs fall under the column headings shown below metgrid metgrid metgrid Name Units Description The most important of these three fields is the metgrid Name field which determines the variable name that will be assigned to a meteorological field when it is written to the intermediate files by ungrib This name should also match an entry in the METGRID TBL file so that the metgrid program can determine how the field is to be horizontally interpolated The metgrid Units and metgrid Description fields specify the units and a short description for the field respectively here it is important to note that if no description is given for a field then ungrib will not write that field out to the intermediate files The final group of fields which provide GRIB2 specific information are found under the column headings below GRIB2 GRIB2 GRIB2 GRIB2 Discp Catgy Param Level The GRIB2 fields are only needed in a Vtable that is to be used for GRIB Edition 2 data sets although hav
35. lrwxrwxrwx 1 38 GRIBFILE AAA gt data gfs gfs_ 080324 12 00 lrwxrwxrwx 1 38 GRIBFILE AAB gt data gfs gfs_ 080324 12 06 rwxr xr x 1 1328 link grib csh drwxr xr x 3 4096 metgrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 metgrid exe gt metgrid src metgrid exe rw r r 1 1094 namelist wps rw r ra 1 1987 namelist wps all options rw r r 1 1075 namelist wps global Pwarear 652 namelist wps nmm rw r r 1 4786 README drwxr xr x 4 4096 ungrib lrwxrwxrwx 1 21 ungrib exe gt ungrib src ungrib exe drwxr xr x 3 4096 util lrwxrwxrwx 1 33 Vtable gt ungrib Variable Tables Vtable GFS After editing the namelist wps file and linking the appropriate Vtable and GRIB files the ungrib exe executable may be run to produce files of meteorological data in the intermediate format Ungrib may be run by simply typing the following gt ungrib exe gt amp ungrib output Since the ungrib program may produce a significant volume of output it is recommended that ungrib output be redirected to a file as in the command above If ungrib exe runs successfully the message Prrrr rr rrr rrr rrr bbb bbb tbe Successful completion of ungrib Prrr rrr rrr rrr rrr bbb A TSA O e A S D A E SS tet will be written to the end of the ungrib output file and the intermediate files should appear in the current working directory The intermediate files written by ungrib will have names of the form FILE YyYYY MM DD HH unless of course the prefix variable
36. mass flux limit SAS scheme 84 vortex_tracker Vortex Tracking Algorithm for HWRF 1 default follow vortex using MSLP operational HWRF 2011 algorithm 2 follow vortex using MSLP revised 3 track vortex in nest and use that result to move this domain 4 follow vortex using storm centroid 5 follow vortex using dynamic pressure 6 follow vortex using the tracking algorithm of the GFDL vortex tracker operational HWRF 2013 algorithm will be available in HWRF V3 5a release New vortex following algorithm under development nomove_freq Disable nest movement at certain intervals to prevent noise in the output files so that nest will not move at analysis time or multiples of this interval if this interval is set to a positive number movemin Frequency with which nest tracker routine will be called in HWRF multiples of nphs amp noah_mp options for the Noah MP land surface model see http www rap ucar edu research land technol ogy noahmp_Ism php dveg Dynamic vegetation option l off LAI Leaf Area Index from table FVEG veg fraction shdfac model variable for veg fraction 2 default on 3 off LAI from table FVEG calculated 4 off LAI from table FVEG maximum veg fraction opt_crs Stomatal resistance option 1 default Ball Berry 2 Jarvis WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 37 Variable Names Value Example Description o
37. messages should be sent to standard output When debug_level is set to 0 only generally useful messages and warning messages will be written to standard output When debug_level is greater than 100 informational messages that provide further runtime details are also written to standard output Debugging messages and messages specifically intended for log files are never written to standard output but are always written to the log files Default value is 0 B GEOGRID section This section specifies variables that are specific to the geogrid program Variables in the geogrid section primarily define the size and location of all model domains and where the static geographical data are found 1 PARENT_ID A list of MAX_DOM integers specifying for each nest the domain number of the nest s parent for the coarsest domain this variable should be set to 1 Default value is 1 2 PARENT_GRID_RATIO A list of MAX_DOM integers specifying for each nest the nesting ratio relative to the domain s parent This must be set to 3 for WRF NMM No default value 3 I PARENT_START A list of MAX_DOM integers specifying for each nest the x coordinate of the lower left corner of the nest in the parent unstaggered grid For the coarsest domain a value of 1 should be specified No default value For WRF NMM nests see note on page 3 15 4 J_PARENT_START A list of MAX_DOM integers specifying for each nest the y coordinate of the lower left cor
38. see below The rest of these settings are not required but the user may want to try some of these settings if difficulties are encountered during the build process In C shell syntax e setenv WRF_NMM_CORE 1 explicitly turns on WRF NMM core to build e setenv WRF_NMM_NEST 1 nesting is desired using the WRF NMM core WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 5 e setenv HWRF 1 explicitly specifies that WRF NMM will be built for the HWRE configuration set along with previous two environment settings e unset limits especially if you are on a small system e setenv MP_STACK_SIZE 64000000 OpenMP blows through the stack size set it large e setenv MPICH_F90 f90 or whatever your FORTRAN compiler may be called WRF needs the bin lib and include directories e setenv OMP_NUM_THREADS n where n is the number of processors to use In systems with OpenMP installed this is how the number of threads is specified Building the WRF System for the NMM Core Obtaining and Opening the WRF Package The WRF NMM source code tar file may be downloaded from http www dtcenter org wrf nmm users downloads Note Always obtain the latest version of the code if you are not trying to continue a pre existing project WRFV3 is just used as an example here Once the sar file is obtained gunzip and untar the file tar zxvf WRF V3 TAR gz The end product will be a WRF V3 directory that contains
39. south_north west_east float QVAPOR Time bottom_top south_north west_east float QCLOUD Time bottom_top south_north west_east float QRAIN Time bottom_top south_north west_east float QSNOW Time bottom_top south_north west_east float SMOIS Time soil_layers_stag south_north west_east float PSFC Time south_north west_east float TH2 Time south_north west_east float U10 Time south_north west_east float V10 Time south_north west_east float LAI Time south_north west_east float SMSTAV Time south_north west_east float SMSTOT Time south_north west_east float SFROFF Time south_north west_east float UDROFF Time south_north west_east int IVGTYP Time south_north west_east int ISLTYP Time south_north west_east float VEGFRA Time south_north west_east float SEFCEVP Time south_north west_east float GRDFLX Time south_north west_east float SFCEXC Time south_north west_east float ACSNOW Time south_north west_east float ACSNOM Time south_north west_east float SNOW Time south_north west_east float CANWAT Time south_north west_east float SST Time south_north west_east float WEASD Time south_north west_east float NOAHRES Time south_north west_east float THZO Time south_north west_east float QZ0 Time south_north west_east float UZO Time south_north west_east float VZO Time south_north wes
40. such as topography height and land use category as well as for the GWDO fields Using Multiple Meteorological Data Sources The metgrid program is capable of interpolating time invariant fields and it can also interpolate from multiple sources of meteorological data The first of these capabilities uses the constants_name variable in the metgrid namelist record This variable may be set to a list of filenames including path information where necessary of intermediate formatted files which contains time invariant fields and which should be used in the output for every time period processed by metgrid For example short simulations may use a constant SST field this field need only be available at a single time and may be used by setting the constants name variable to the path and filename of the SST intermediate file Typical uses of constants name might look like metgrid constants name data ungribbed constants SST FILE 2006 08 16 12 or metgrid constants name LANDSEA SOILHGT The second metgrid capability that of interpolating data from multiple sources may be useful in situations where two or more complementary data sets need to be combined to produce the full input data needed by reali To interpolate from multiple sources of time varying meteorological data the fg_name variable in the metgrid namelist record should be set to a list of prefixes of intermediate files including path information
41. unipost To add this field to the output modify the entry to read SURFACE DEWPOINT _ SCAL 4 0 L 10000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Running UPP WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 11 Six scripts for running the Unified Post Processor package are included in the tar file run_unipost run_unipostandgrads run_unipostandgempak run_unipost_frames run_unipost_gracet run_unipost_minute Before running any of the above listed scripts perform the following instructions 1 cd to your DOMAINPATH directory 2 Make a directory to put the UPP results mkdir postprd 3 Make a directory to put a copy of wrf_cntrl parm file mkdir parm 4 Copy over the default UPPV2 1 parm wrf_cntrl parm to your working directory to customize unipost 5 Edit the wrf_cntrl parm file to reflect the fields and levels you want wnipost to output 6 Copy over the UPPV2 1 scripts run_unipost script of your choice to the postprd 7 Edit the run script as outlined below Once these directories are set up and the edits outlined above are completed the scripts can be run interactively from the postprd directory by simply typing the script name on the command line Overview of the scripts to run the UPP Note It is recommended that the user refer to the run_unipost scripts in the script while reading this overview 1 Set up variables TOP_DIR top level directory for source codes UPPV2 1 and WRFV
42. 0 287764f DYN_OPT 4 CEN_LAT 32 f CEN_LON 83 f TRUELAT1 1 e 20f TRUELAT2 1 e 20f MOAD CEN_LAT 0 f TERENU WJ STAND_LON 1 e 20f POLE LAT 90 f POLE LON 0 f corner lats 26 39329f 37 31068f 37 31068f 26 39329f 26 40831L 37 3276 37 29281f 26 37742 Oof Ost Of Q Ey 0 OE O OE corner lons 88 78565f 89 519f 76 481f 77 21435f 88 46474f 89 1577 76 11986f 76 89354f O0 f O f O f O f O f O f OE OSE MAP_PROJ 203 MMINLU USGS NUM_LAND CAT 24 ISWATER 16 ISLAKE 1 ISICE 24 ISURBAN 1 ISOILWATER 14 grid id I parent_id 1 i_ parent start j_parent_start 0 i_parent_end 19 j_parent_end 39 OD parent g id ratio 1 ish x S LF rs oy Sr In addition to the fields in a geogrid output file e g geo_nmm d01 nc the following fields and global attributes will also be present in a typical output file from the metgrid program run with the default METGRID TBL file and meteorological data from NCEP s GFS model netcdf met_nmm d01 2008 01 11 00 00 00 dimensions WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 57 Time UNLIMITED 1 currently DateStrLen 19 west_east 19 south north 39 num_metgrid levels 27 num_sm_levels 4 num_st_levels
43. 11th Conf on NWP Norfolk VA American Meteorological Society 354 355 Janjic Z I 1997 Advection Scheme for Passive Substances in the NCEP Eta Model Research Activities in Atmospheric and Oceanic Modeling WMO Geneva CAS JSC WGNE 3 14 Janjic Z I 2000 Comments on Development and Evaluation of a Convection Scheme for Use in Climate Models J Atmos Sci 57 p 3686 Janjic Z I 2001 Nonsingular Implementation of the Mellor Yamada Level 2 5 Scheme in the NCEP Meso model NCEP Office Note No 437 61 pp WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 56 Janjic Z I 2002a A Nonhydrostatic Model Based on a New Approach EGS XVIII Nice France 21 26 April 2002 Janjic Z I 2002b Nonsingular Implementation of the Mellor Yamada Level 2 5 Scheme in the NCEP Meso model NCEP Office Note No 437 61 pp Janjic Z I 2003a A Nonhydrostatic Model Based on a New Approach Meteorology and Atmospheric Physics 82 271 285 Online http dx doi org 10 1007 s00703 001 0587 6 Janjic Z I 2003b The NCEP WRF Core and Further Development of Its Physical Package 5th International SRNWP Workshop on Non Hydrostatic Modeling Bad Orb Germany 27 29 October Janjic Z I 2004 The NCEP WRF Core 12 7 Extended Abstract 20th Conference on Weather Analysis and Forecasting 16th Conference on Numerical Weather Prediction Seattle WA American Meteorological Society Janjic Z I J P Gerrity Jr and S Nickovic 2001 An Alterna
44. API a distributed memory machine with the appropriate MPI libraries or on a distributed cluster utilizing both OpenMP and MPI For WRF NMM it is recommended at this time to compile either serial or utilizing distributed memory The WPS package also runs on the above listed systems Required Compilers and Scripting Languages WRF System Software Requirements The WRF model is written in FORTRAN what many refer to as FORTRAN 90 The software layer RSL LITE which sits between WRF and the MPI interface are written in C Ancillary programs that perform file parsing and file construction both of which are required for default building of the WRF modeling code are written in C Thus FORTRAN 90 or 95 and C compilers are required Additionally the WRF build mechanism uses several scripting languages including perl to handle various tasks such as the code browser designed by Brian Fiedler C shell and Bourne shell The traditional UNIX text file processing utilities are used make M4 sed and awk If OpenMP compilation is desired OpenMP libraries are required The WRF I O API also supports WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 2 netCDF PHDS and GriB 1 formats hence one of these libraries needs to be available on the computer used to compile and run WRF See Chapter 6 WRF Software Required Software for a more detailed listing of the necessary pieces for the WRF build WPS Software Requirements The WRF Preprocessing System WPS requ
45. FieldType 104 HASYS MemoryOrder XY HASYS units whoknows HASYS description something HASYS stagger M HASYS sr x 1 HASYS sr y 1 float HASYW Time south north west east HASYW FieldType 104 HASYW MemoryOrder XY HASYW units whoknows WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 64 HASYW description something ASYW stagger M HASYW sr x 1 HASYW sr_ y 1 float HSTDV Time south orth west east HSTDV FieldType 104 HSTDV MemoryOrder XY HSTDV units whoknows HSTDV description something HSTDV stagger M HSTDV sr x 1 HSTDV sr y 1 float HCNVX Time south north west east HCNVX FieldType 104 HCNVX MemoryOrder XY HCNVX units whoknows HCNVX description something HCNVX stagger M HCNVX sr x 1 HCNVX sr y 1 float LU_INDEX Time south north west east UU_INDEX FieldType 104 1U_INDEX MemoryOrder XY T INDEX Units category UU_INDEX description Dominant category 1U_INDEX stagger M U INDEX sr x 1 U INDEX sr y 1 float LANDUSEF Time z dimension0024 south north west east LANDUSEF FieldType 104 LANDUSEF MemoryOrder XYZ LANDUSEF units category LANDUSEF description 24 category USGS landuse LANDUSEF stagger M LANDUSEF sr x 1 LANDUSEF sr y 1
46. NMM V3 User s Guide 5 6 b FDL scheme Eta operational radiation scheme An older multi band scheme with carbon dioxide ozone and microphysics effects 99 This scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP Note Ifit is desired to run GFDL with a microphysics scheme other than Ferrier a modification to module_ra_gfdleta F is needed to comment out define FERRIER_GFDL c Modified GFDL scheme Similar to the GFDL scheme b but modified to be suitable for the tropics 98 This scheme is well tested and used operationally at NCEP for HWRF New in Version 3 2 d CAM scheme from the CAM 3 climate model used in CCSM Allows for aerosols and trace gases 3 It uses yearly CO2 and constant N2O 31 1e 9 and CH4 1714e 9 See section 2 3 for the time varying option e RRTMG scheme A new version of RRTM 4 It includes the MCICA method of random cloud overlap For major trace gases CO2 379e 6 N20 319e 9 CH4 1774e 9 See section 2 3 for the time varying option f New Goddard scheme 5 Efficient multiple bands ozone from climatology It uses constant CO2 337e 6 N20 320e 9 CH4 1790e 9 New in Version 3 3 g Fu Liou Gu scheme 7 Multiple bands cloud and cloud fraction effects ozone profile from climatology and tracer gases CO2 345e 6 New in Version 3 4 Shortwave Radiation ra_sw_physics a Dudhia scheme Simple downward integration allowing efficiently for clouds and clear sky absorption and
47. Observation nudging Not yet available in the WRF NMM amp dynamics Dynamics options dyn_opt 4 4 WRF NMM dynamics non_hydrostatic true Whether running the model in hydrostatic or non hydrostatic model euler_adv true Logical switch that turns on off passive advection new in v3 2 ONLY compatible with Ferrier MP 5 else set to false idtadt 1 Dynamics timestep between calls to the passive advection for dynamics variables idtadc 1 Dynamics timestep between calls to the passive advection for chemistry variables codamp 6 4 Divergence damping weighting factor larger more damping coac 1 6 Horizontal diffusion weighting factor larger more diffusion slophe 6 364e 3 Maximum model level slope dZ dy for which horizontal diffusion is applied wp 0 15 Off centering weight in the updating of nonhyrostatic eps amp bc_control Boundary condition control spec_bdy_width 1 Total number of rows for specified boundary value nudging It MUST be set to 1 for WRF NMM core specified max_dom true Specified boundary conditions only applies to domain 1 amp grib2 amp namelist_quilt Option for asynchronized I O for MPI WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 39 Variable Names Value Description Example applications nio_tasks_per_group 0 Default value is 0 means no quilting value gt 0 quilting I O nio_ groups 1 Default is 1 May be se
48. Processor UPP UPP Introduction UPP Required Software Obtaining the UPP Code UPP Directory Structure Installing the UPP Code UPP Functionalities Setting up the WRF model to interface with UPP UPP Control File Overview o Controlling which variables unipost outputs o Controlling which levels unipost outputs Running UPP o Overview of the scripts to run UPP Visualization with UPP o GEMPAK o GrADS Fields Produced by unipost RIP4 RIP Introduction RIP Software Requirements RIP Environment Settings Obtaining the RIP Code RIP Directory Structure Installing the RIP Code RIP Functionalities RIP Data Preparation RIPDP o RIPDP Namelist o Running RIPDP RIP User Input File UIF Running RIP o Calculating and Plotting Trajectories with RIP o Creating Vis5D Datasets with RIP WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 7 2 7 3 cee 7 4 7 6 71 7 9 7 10 zii 7 11 7 12 715 7 15 7 16 ti 7 32 7 32 7 32 7 32 7 33 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 42 7 43 7 47 iii User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 1 Overview Table of Contents e Introduction e The WRF NMM System Program Components Introduction The Nonhydrostatic Mesoscale Model NMM core of the Weather Research and Forecasting WRF system was developed by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Adminstration NOAA National Centers for Environmental Prediction NCEP The current release is Versi
49. Surface midday albedo SFC MIDDAY ALBEDO 84 1 Sea surface temperature SEA SFC TEMPERATURE 80 1 Press at tropopause PRESS AT TROPOPAUSE 1 7 Temperature at tropopause TEMP AT TROPOPAUSE 11 7 Potential temperature at POTENTL TEMP AT TROP 13 7 tropopause U wind at tropopause U WIND AT 33 7 TROPOPAUSE V wind at tropopause V WIND AT 34 7 TROPOPAUSE Wind shear at tropopause SHEAR AT TROPOPAUSE 136 7 Height at tropopause HEIGHT AT 7 7 TROPOPAUSE Temperature at flight levels TEMP AT FD HEIGHTS 11 103 U wind at flight levels U WIND AT FD HEIGHTS 33 103 V wind at flight levels V WIND AT FD HEIGHTS 34 103 Freezing level height above HEIGHT OF FRZ LVL 7 4 mean sea level Freezing level RH REL HUMID AT FRZLVL 52 4 Highest freezing level height HIGHEST FREEZE LVL 7 204 Pressure in boundary layer PRESS IN BNDRY LYR 1 116 30 mb mean Temperature in boundary layer TEMP IN BNDRY LYR 11 116 30 mb mean Potential temperature in boundary POT TMP IN BNDRY LYR 13 116 layers 30 mb mean Dew point temperature in DWPT IN BNDRY LYR 17 116 boundary layer 30 mb mean Specific humidity in boundary SPC HUM IN BNDRY LYR 51 116 layer 30 mb mean RH in boundary layer REL HUM IN BNDRY LYR 52 116 30 mb mean WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 22 Moisture convergence in MST CNV IN BNDRY LYR 135 116 boundary layer
50. accumulated over user specified bucket Grid scale precipitation BUCKET GRDSCALE 62 1 accumulated over user specified PRCP bucket Snow accumulated over user BUCKET SNOW PRECIP 65 1 specified bucket Model level fraction of rain for F_rain ON MDL SFCS 131 109 Ferrier s scheme Model level fraction of ice for F_ice ON MDL SFCS 132 109 Ferrier s scheme Model level riming factor for F_RimeF ON MDL SFCS 133 109 Ferrier s scheme Model level total condensate for CONDENSATE MDL SFCS 135 109 Ferrier s scheme Height of sigma surface HEIGHT OF SIGMA SFCS 7 107 Temperature on sigma surface TEMP ON SIGMA SFCS 11 107 Specific humidity on sigma SPEC HUM ON S SFCS 51 107 surface U wind on sigma surface U WIND ON SIGMA SFCS 33 107 V wind on sigma surface V WIND ON SIGMA SFCS 34 107 Omega on sigma surface OMEGA ON SIGMA SFCS 39 107 Cloud water on sigma surface CLOUD WATR ON S SFCS 153 107 Cloud ice on sigma surface CLOUD ICE ON S SFCS 58 107 Rain on sigma surface RAIN ON S SFCS 170 107 Snow on sigma surface SNOW ON S SFCS 171 107 Condensate on sigma surface CONDENSATE ON S SFCS 135 107 Pressure on sigma surface PRESS ON SIG SFCS 1 107 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 25 Turbulent kinetic energy on sigma TRBLNT KE ON S SFCS 158 107 surface Cloud fraction on sigma surface CLD FRAC ON SIG SFCS 71 107 Grau
51. an application the steps include WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 14 read nav lt copygb_gridnay txt export nav copygb exe xg nav WRFPRS_ domain fhr wrfprs_ domain fhr If scripts run_unipostandgrads or run_unipostandgempak are used additional steps are taken to create image files see Visualization section below Upon a successful run unipost and copygb will generate output files WRFPRS_dnn hh and wrfprs_dnn hh respectively in the post processor working directory where nn refers to the domain id and hh denotes the forecast hour In addition the script run_unipostandgrads will produce a suite of gif images named variablehh_GrADS gif and the script run_unipostandgempak will produce a suite of gif images named variablehh gif If the run did not complete successfully a log file in the post processor working directory called unipost_dnn hh out where nn is the domain id and hh is the forecast hour may be consulted for further information It should be noted that copygb is a flexible program that can accept several command line options specifying details of how the horizontal interpolation from the native grid to the output grid should be performed Complete documentation of copygb can be found at http www dtcenter org met users support online_tutorial METv4 0 copygb copygb txt Visualization with UPP GEMPAK The GEMPAK utility nagrib is able to decode GRIB files whose navigation is on any
52. and check for errors copygb exe xg grid kgds input _file output file where grid refers to the output grid to which the native forecast is being interpolated The output grid can be specified in three ways i As the grid id of a pre defined AWIPS grid copygb exe g gridno x input_file output_file For example using grid 218 copygb exe xg 218 WRFPRS_ domain fhr wrfprs_ domain fhr ii As a user defined standard grid such as for grid 255 copygb exe xg 255 kgds input_file output_file where the user defined grid is specified by a full set of kgds parameters determining a GRIB GDS grid description section in the W3fi63 format Details on how to specify the kgds parameters are documented in file lib w3lib w3fi71 f For example copygb exe xg 255 3 109 91 37719 77645 8 71000 10433 9966 0 64 42000 42000 WRFPRS_ domain fhr wrfprs_Sdomain fhr iii Specifying output grid as a file When WRF NMM output in is processed by unipost two text files copygb_gridnav txt and copygb_hwrf txt are created These files contain the GRID GDS of a Lambert Conformal Grid file copygb_gridnay txt or lat lon grid copygb_hwrf txt similar in domain and grid spacing to the one used to run the WRF NMM model The contents of one of these files are read into variable nav and can be used as input to copygb exe copygb exe xg S nav input file output file For example when using copygb_gridnav txt for
53. and graupel processes suitable for real data high resolution simulations 2 c WRF Single Moment 3 class scheme A simple efficient scheme with ice and snow processes suitable for mesoscale grid sizes 3 d WRF Single Moment 5 class scheme A slightly more sophisticated version of c that allows for mixed phase processes and super cooled water 4 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM e Eta microphysics The operational microphysics in NCEP models A simple efficient scheme with diagnostic mixed phase processes For fine resolutions lt 5km use option 5 and for coarse resolutions use option 95 This scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP f Eta HWRF microphysics Similar to Eta microphysics e but modified to be suitable for the tropics 85 This scheme is well tested and used operationally at NCEP for HWRF New in Version 3 2 g WRF Single Moment 6 class scheme A scheme with ice snow and graupel processes suitable for high resolution simulations 6 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM h Goddard microphysics scheme A scheme with ice snow and graupel processes suitable for high resolution simulations 7 New in Version 3 0 i New Thompson et al scheme A new scheme with ice snow and graupel processes suitable for high resolution simulations 8 This adds rain number concentration and WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 3 updates the scheme from
54. appearance color line style labeling etc of all aspects of the plots WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 34 RIP Data Preparation RIPDP RIP does not ingest model output files directly First a preprocessing step RIPDP which stands for RIP Data Preparation must be executed which converts the model output data files to RIP format data files The primary difference between these two types of files is that model output is in NetCDF or GRIB format and may contain all times and all variables in a single file or a few files whereas RIP data has each variable at each time in a separate file in binary format RIPDP reads in a model output file or files and separates out each variable at each time There are several basic variables that RIPDP expects to find and these are written out to files with names that are chosen by RIPDP such as uuu vvv prs etc These are the variable names that RIP users are familiar with However RIPDP can also process unexpected variables that it encounters in model output data files creating RIP data file names for these variables from the variable name that is stored in the model output file metadata When you run make it should produce executable programs called ripdp_mm5 ripdp_wrfarw and ripdp_wrfnmm Although these are three separate programs they serve the same purpose and only ripdp_wrfnmm will be described here The WRF NMM model uses a rotated latitude longitude projection on the E grid both
55. are not in a standard path that will be checked automatically by the compiler the paths to these libraries can be added on to the JasPer environment variables for example if the PNG libraries were installed in usr local libpng 1 2 29 and the zlib libraries were installed in usr local zlib 1 2 3 one might use setenv JASPERLIB JASPERLIB L usr local libpng 1 2 29 ib L usrlocal zlib 1 2 3 lib setenv JASPERINC JASPERINC I usr local libpng 1 2 29 include T usr ocal zlib 1 2 3 include after having previously set JASPERLIB and JASPERINC 1 JasPer an implementation of the JPEG2000 standard for lossy compression http www ece uvic ca mdadams jasper Go down to JasPer software one of the click here parts is the source configure make make install Note The GRIB2 libraries expect to find include files in jasper jasper h so it may be necessary to manually create a jasper subdirectory in the include directory created by the JasPer installation and manually link header files there 2 zlib another compression library which is used by the PNG library http www zlib net Go to The current release is publicly available here section and download WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 4 configure make make install 3 PNG compression library for lossless compression http www libpng org pub png libpng html Scroll down to Source code and choose a mirror site configure make check
56. associated with each static data set An index file defines parameters specific to that data set while the GEOGRID TBL file describes how each of the data sets should be treated by geogrid As with the GEOGRID TBL file specifications in an index file are of the form keyword value Below are possible keywords and their possible values 1 PROJECTION A character string specifying the projection of the data which may be either lambert polar mercator regular 11 albers nad83 Or polar wgs84 No default value 2 TYPE A character string either categorical or continuous that determines whether the data in the data files should be interpreted as a continuous field or as discrete indices For categorical data represented by a fractional field for each possible category type should be set to continuous No default value 3 SIGNED Either yes or no indicating whether the values in the data files which are always represented as integers are signed in two s complement form or not Default value is no 4 UNITS A character string enclosed in quotation marks specifying the units of the interpolated field the string will be written to the geogrid output files as a variable time independent attribute No default value 5 DESCRIPTION A character string enclosed in quotation marks giving a short description of the interpolated field the string will be written to the geogrid output files as a variable time independent attribute
57. cloud top height GSD CLD TOP HEIGHT 7 3 GSD visibility GSD VISIBILITY 20 1 Wind energy potential INSTN WIND POWER 126 105 AGL U wind at 80 m above ground U WIND AT 80M AGL 49 105 V wind at 80 m above ground V WIND AT 80M AGL 50 105 Graupel on model surface GRAUPEL ON MDL SFCS 179 109 Graupel on pressure surface GRAUPEL ON P SFCS 179 100 Maximum updraft helicity MAX UPDRAFT 236 106 HELICITY Maximum 1km reflectivity MAX Ikm REFLECTIVITY 235 105 Maximum wind speed at 10m MAX 10m WIND SPEED 229 105 Maximum updraft vertical MAX UPDRAFT VERT 237 101 velocity VEL Maximum downdraft vertical MAX DNDRAFT VERT 238 101 velocity VEL WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 24 Mean vertical velocity MEAN VERT VEL 40 108 Radar echo top in KDT ECHO TOPS IN KFT 7 105 Updraft helicity UPDRAFT HELICITY PRM 227 106 Column integrated graupel VERT INTEG GRAUP 179 200 Column integrated maximum MAX VERT INTEG 228 200 graupel GRAUP U component of 0 1km level U COMP 0 1 KM SHEAR 230 106 wind shear V component of 0 1km level V COMP 0 1 KM SHEAR 238 106 wind shear U component of 0 6km level U COMP 0 6 KM SHEAR 239 106 wind shear V component of 0 6km level V COMP 0 6 KM SHEAR 241 106 wind shear Total precipitation accumulated BUCKET TOTAL PRECIP 61 1 over user specified bucket Convective precipitation BUCKET CONV PRECIP 63 1
58. conic projections or the only true latitude for azimuthal projections No default value 14 TRUELAT2 A real value specifying the second true latitude for conic projections No default value 15 WORDSIZE An integer giving the number of bytes used to represent the value of each grid point in the data files No default value 16 TILE_X An integer specifying the number of grid points in the x direction excluding any halo points for a single tile of source data No default value 17 TILE_Y An integer specifying the number of grid points in the y direction excluding any halo points for a single tile of source data No default value 18 TILE_Z An integer specifying the number of grid points in the z direction for a single tile of source data this keyword serves as an alternative to the pair of keywords tile z start and tile z end and when this keyword is used the starting z index is assumed to be 1 No default value 19 TILE_Z_START An integer specifying the starting index in the z direction of the array in the data files If this keyword is used tile _z end must also be specified No default value WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 43 20 TILE_Z_END An integer specifying the ending index in the z direction of the array in the data files If this keyword is used tile _z start must also be specified No default value 21 CATEGORY_MIN For categorical data type categorical an integer specifying the minimum category i
59. data No default value 20 VERTICAL_INTERP_OPTION A character string specifying the vertical interpolation method that should be used when vertically interpolating to missing points Currently this option is not implemented No default value 21 FLAG_IN_OUTPUT A character string giving the name of a global attribute which will be assigned a value of 1 and written to the metgrid output if the interpolated field is to be output output yes Default value is null i e no flag will be written for the field WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 47 Available Interpolation Options in Geogrid and Metgrid Through the GEOGRID TBL and METGRID TBL files the user can control the method by which source data either static fields in the case of geogrid or meteorological fields in the case of metgrid are interpolated In fact a list of interpolation methods may be given in which case if it is not possible to employ the i th method in the list the i 1 st method will be employed until either some method can be used or there are no methods left to try in the list For example to use a four point bi linear interpolation scheme for a field we could specify interp_option four_pt However if the field had areas of missing values which could prevent the four _pt option from being used we could request that a simple four point average be tried if the four_pt method couldn t be used by specifying interp_option four _pt average_ 4pt instead Below
60. file for RIPDP contains the namelist amp userin All of the amp userin namelist variables are listed below Each variable has a default value which is the value this variable will take if its specification is omitted from the namelist Additional details for each namelist variable can be found in Chapter 3 of the full RIP User s Guide Variable Name Default Value Description ptimes 9 0E 09 Times to process This can be a string of times or a series in the form of A B C which is interpreted as times from hour A to hour B every C hours ptimeunits h Units of ptimes This can be either h for hours m for minutes or s for seconds iptimes 99999999 Times to process in the form of 8 digit mdate times i e YYMMDDHH A value of 99999999 indicates ptimes is being used instead tacc 1 0 Time tolerance in seconds Any times encountered in the model output that are within tacc seconds of one of the times specified in ptimes or iptimes will be processed discard Names of variables that if encountered in the model data file will not be processed retain a Names of variables that if encountered in the model data file should be processed even though the user specified basic on the ripdp_wrfnmm command line iinterp 0 NMM Only Method for defining B grid described above 0 Collocated high density B grid 1 Interpolate to a new B grid If iinterp 1 then the
61. float GRNFLX Time south_north west_east float PCTSNO Time south_north west_east float SOILTB Time south_north west_east float VEGFRC Time south_north west_east float SH2O Time soil_layers_stag south_north west_east float SMC Time soil_layers_stag south_north west_east float STC Time soil_layers_stag south_north west_east float HSTDV Time south_north west_east float HCNVX Time south_north west_east float HASYW Time south_north west_east float HASYS Time south_north west_east float HASYSW Time south_north west_east float HASYNW Time south_north west_east float HLENW Time south_north west_east float HLENS Time south_north west_east float HLENSW Time south_north west_east float HLENNW Time south_north west_east float HANGL Time south_north west_east float HANIS Time south_north west_east WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 51 float HSLOP Time south_north west_east float HZMAX Time south_north west_east float UGWDSFC Time south_north west_east float VGWDSFC Time south_north west_east float PINT Time bottom_top_stag south_north west_east float W Time bottom_top_stag south_north west_east float ACFRCV Time south_north west_east float ACFRST Time south_north west_east float SSROFF Time south_north west_east float BGROFF Time south_north west_east float RLWIN Time south_north west_east flo
62. floating point format The keywords that are associated with an integer variable also expect values that are of Fortran floating point format because they are initially read in as a floating point number and then rounded not truncated to the nearest integer The keywords that are associated with a character variable expect values that are character strings They should NOT be in single quotes and should also not have any blank characters commas or semicolons in them The keywords that are associated with a logical variable should not have any value They are set as FALSE by default and simply the fact that the keyword appears will cause the associated variable to be set to TRUE The keywords that are associated with an array of any type may expect more than one value The values should be separated by commas as mentioned above All keywords are set to a default value prior to the reading of the PST With regard to the default setting of keywords there are two basic types of keywords those that remember their values and those that forget their values The type that remembers its value is set to its default value only at the outset and then it simply retains its value from one PSL to the next and even from one FSG to the next unless it is explicitly changed by a PSS The type that forgets its value is reset to its default value after every PSL Keywords that remember are primarily those that deal with location e g the subdomain for
63. hour at the start of the NMM integration Set to gt 0 if restarting a run analysis false This flag is only for the HWRF configuration True Nested domain will read in initial conditions from a file instead of being initialized by interpolation from the coarse domain False Nested domain will get its initial condition by interpolation from the coarse domain Will output an analysis file containing the variables with restart IO characteristics for the nested domain anl_outname wrfanl_d02_y specify the name of the analysis output aca file restart false Logical indicating whether run is a restart run restart_interval 60 Restart output file interval in minutes reset_simulation_start Whether to overwrite simulation_start_date with F forecast start time io0_form_history 2 Format of history file wrfout 1 binary format no supported post processing software available 2 netCDF 102 split netCDF files on per processor no supported post processing software for split files 4 PHDF5 format no supported post processing software available 5 GRIB 1 10 GRIB 2 11 Parallel netCDF WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 26 Variable Names Value Description Example io_form_restart 2 Format of restart file wrfrst 2 netCDF 102 split netCDF files on per processor must restart with the same number of processors 10_form_input 2 Format of input file wrfinput_d01 2 netCDF
64. i0_form_boundary 2 Format of boundary file wrfbdy_d01 2 netCDF auxinput1_inname met_nmm_ d01 lt date gt Name of input file from WPS auxinput4_inname wrflowinp_d lt domain gt Input for lower bdy file works with sst_update 1 auxinput4_interval 720 File interval in minutes for lower bdy file max_dom debug_level 0 Control for amount of debug printouts 0 for standard runs no debugging 1 netcdf error messages about missing fields 50 100 200 300 values give increasing prints Large values trace the job s progress through physics and time steps nocolons false when set to true this replaces the colons with underscores in the output file names ned_nofill true default only a single write not the write read write sequence new in V3 6 amp Domains Domain definition time_step Time step for integration of coarsest grid in 18 integer seconds time_step_fract_num 0 Numerator for fractional coarse grid time step time_step_fract_den Denominator for fractional coarse grid time step Example if you want to use 60 3 sec as your time step set time_step 60 time_step_fract_num 3 and time_step_fract_den 10 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 27 Variable Names Value Description Example max_dom 1 Number of domains 1 for a single grid gt 1 for nests s_we max_dom 1 Start index in x west east d
65. is possible to run the geogrid and metgrid programs in a distributed memory configuration In order to compile geogrid and metgrid for distributed memory execution the user must have MPI libraries installed on the target machine and must have compiled WPS using one of the DM parallel configuration options Upon successful compilation the geogrid and metgrid programs may be run with the mpirun or mpiexec commands or through a batch queuing system depending on the machine As mentioned earlier the work of the ungrib program is not amenable to parallelization and further the memory requirements for ungrib s processing are independent of the memory requirements of geogrid and metgrid thus ungrib is always compiled for a single processor and run on a single CPU regardless of whether a DM parallel configuration option was selected during configuration Each of the standard WRF I O API formats NetCDF GRIB1 binary has a corresponding parallel format whose number is given by adding 100 to the io_form value i e the value of io form _geogrid and io form metgrid for the standard format It is not necessary to use a parallel io_form but when one is used each CPU will read write its input output to a separate file whose name is simply the name that would be used during serial execution but with a four digit processor ID appended to the name For example running geogrid on four processors with io_form_geogrid 102 would create output files
66. km over three model layers e Outputs the results in NWS and WMO standard GRIB1 format for GRIB documentation see http www nco ncep noaa gov pmb docs e Destaggers the WRF ARW forecasts from a C grid to an A grid e Outputs two navigation files copygb_nav txt for WRF NMM output only and copygb_hwrf txt for WRF ARW andWRF NMM These files can WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 6 be used as input for copygb gt copygb_nav txt This file contains the GRID GDS of a Lambert Conformal Grid similar in domain and grid spacing to the one used to run the WRF NMM The Lambert Conformal map projection works well for mid latitudes gt copygb_hwrf txt This file contains the GRID GDS of a Latitude Longitude Grid similar in domain and grid spacing to the one used to run the WRF model The latitude longitude grid works well for tropics 2 Copygb e Destaggers the WRF NMM forecasts from the staggered native E grid to a regular non staggered grid Since unipost destaggers WRF ARW output from a C grid to an A grid WRF ARW data can be displayed directly without going through copygb e Interpolates the forecasts horizontally from their native grid to a standard AWIPS or user defined grid for information on AWIPS grids see http www nco ncep noaa gov pmb docs on388 tableb html e Outputs the results in NWS and WMO standard GRIB1 format for GRIB documentation see http www nco ncep noaa gov pmb docs In addition to unipost and copygb
67. make install To get around portability issues the NCEP GRIB libraries w3 and g2 have been included in the WPS distribution The original versions of these libraries are available for download from NCEP at http www nco ncep noaa gov pmb codes GRIB2 The specific tar files to download are g2lib and w3lib Because the ungrib program requires modules from these files they are not suitable for usage with a traditional library option during the link stage of the build UNIX Environment Settings Path names for the compilers and libraries listed above should be defined in the shell configuration files such as cshre or login For example set path usr pgi bin usr pgi lib usr local ncarg bin usr local mpich pgi usr local mpich pgi bin usr local netcdf pgi bin usr local netcdf pgi include setenv PGI usr pgi setenv NETCDF usr local netcdf pgi setenv NCARG_ROOT usr local ncarg setenv LM_LICENSE_FILE PGlI license dat setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH usr lib usrNocal lib usr pgiNinux86 lib usr local netcdf pgi lib In addition there are a few WRF related environmental settings To build the WRF NMM core the environment setting WRF_NMM_CORE is required If nesting will be used the WRF_NMM_NEST environment setting needs to be specified see below A single domain can still be specified even if WRF_NMM_NEST is set to 1 If the WRF NMM will be built for the HWRF configuration the HWRF environment setting also needs to be set
68. map_source field amp units desc xlvl nx ny iproj write unit ounit startloc startlat startlon dx dy amp xlonc truelatl earth_radius WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 27 end if 3 WRITE WIND ROTATION FLAG write unit ounit is_wind_ grid rel 4 WRITE 2 D ARRAY OF DATA write unit ounit slab Creating and Editing Vtables Although Vtables are provided for many common data sets it would be impossible for ungrib to anticipate every possible source of meteorological data in GRIB format When a new source of data is to be processed by ungrib exe the user may create a new Vtable either from scratch or by using an existing Vtable as an example In either case a basic knowledge of the meaning and use of the various fields of the Vtable will be helpful Each Vtable contains either seven or eleven fields depending on whether the Vtable is for a GRIB Edition 1 data source or a GRIB Edition 2 data source respectively The fields of a Vtable fall into one of three categories fields that describe how the data are identified within the GRIB file fields that describe how the data are identified by the ungrib and metgrid programs and fields specific to GRIB Edition 2 Each variable to be extracted by ungrib exe will have one or more lines in the Vtable with multiple lines for data that are split among different level types for example a surface level and upper air levels The fields that must be specified for
69. named geo_em d01 nc 0000 geo_em d01 nc 0001 geo_em d01 nc 0002 and geo_em d01 nc 0003 for the coarse domain During distributed memory execution model domains are decomposed into rectangular patches with each processor working on a single patch When reading writing from to the WRF I O API format each processor reads writes only its patch Consequently if a WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 21 parallel io_form is chosen for the output of geogrid metgrid must be run using the same number of processors as were used to run geogrid Similarly if a parallel io_form is chosen for the metgrid output files the real program must be run using the same number of processors Of course it is still possible to use a standard io_form when running on multiple processors in which case all data for the model domain will be distributed collected upon input output As a final note when geogrid or metgrid are run on multiple processors each processor will write its own log file with the log file names being appended with the same four digit processor ID numbers that are used for the I O API files Checking WPS Output When running the WPS it may be helpful to examine the output produced by the programs For example when determining the location of nests it may be helpful to see the interpolated static geographical data and latitude longitude fields As another example when importing a new source of data into WPS either static data or meteorologica
70. necessary to perform the first step once thereafter only time varying data need to be processed for each simulation using steps two and three Similarly if several model domains are being run for the same time period using the same meteorological data source it is not necessary to run ungrib separately for each simulation Below the details of each of the three steps are explained Step 1 Define model domains with geogrid In the root of the WPS directory structure symbolic links to the programs geogrid exe ungrib exe and metgrid exe should exist if the WPS software was successfully installed In addition to these three links a namelist wps file should exist Thus a listing in the WPS root directory should look something like gt Is drwxr xr x 2 4096 arch rwxr xr x 1 1672 clean rwxr xr x 1 3510 compile rw r r 1 85973 compile output rwxr xr x 1 4257 configure rw r r 1 2486 configure wps drwxr xr x 4 4096 geogrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 geogrid exe gt geogrid src geogrid exe rwxr xr x 1 1328 link grib csh drwxr xr x 3 4096 metgrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 metgrid exe gt metgrid src metgrid exe rw r r 1 1101 namelist wps Ewor pe l 1987 namelist wps all_ options W f r 1 1075 namelist wps global fwer rC gt 1 652 namelist wps nmm rw r r 1 4786 README drwxr xr x 4 4096 ungrib lrwxrwxrwx 1 21 ungrib exe gt ungrib src ungrib exe drwxr xr x 3 4096 util
71. of which introduce special challenges for processing and plotting WRF NMM data RIPDP and RIP have been modified to handle the rotated latitude longitude projection however the grid staggering in WRF NMM requires additional data processing Because of its developmental history with the MM5 model RIP is inextricably linked with an assumed B grid staggering system Therefore the easiest way to deal with E grid data is to make it look like B grid data This can be done in two ways either of which the user can choose E grid B grid In the first method dinterp 0 we define a B grid in which its mass h points collocate with all the mass H and velocity V points in the E grid and the B grid s velocity v points are staggered in the usual B grid way see illustration below The RIPDP created data files retain only the E grid data but then when they are ingested into RIP the E grid H point data are transferred directly to overlapping B grid mass points and non overlapping B grid mass points and all velocity points are interpolated from the E grid s WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 35 H and V points This is the best way to retain as much of the exact original data as possible but effectively doubles the number of horizontal grid points in RIP which can be undesirable iinterp 0 Vv The second method iinterp is to define a completely new B grid that has no relation to the E grid points possibly or even preferably inc
72. other to set the value For an integer variable named my_nml_var the following code snippet provides an example of the easy access to the namelist variables INTEGER my_nml_var dom_id CALL nl_get_my_nml_var dom_id my_nml_var The subroutine takes two arguments The first is the input integer domain identifier for example J for the most coarse grid 2 for the second domain and the second argument is the returned value of the namelist variable The associated subroutine to set the namelist variable with the same argument list is n _set_my_nml_var For namelist variables that are scalars the grid identifier should be set to Z The rconfig line may also be used to define variables that are convenient to pass around in the model usually part of a derived configuration such as the number of microphysics Species associated with a physics package In this case the lt How set gt column entry is derived This variable does not appear in the namelist but is accessible with the same generated nl_set and nl_get subroutines Registry Halo Period and Xpose WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 11 The distributed memory inter processor communications are fully described in the Registry file An entry in the Registry constructs a code segment which is included with cpp in the source code Following is an example of a halo communication split across two lines and interleaved for readability lt Table gt lt CommName gt lt Core gt
73. plotted either as horizontal or vertical trajectory plots ptyp ht or ptyp vt WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 45 e feld gridswarm This is the same as swarm except it works on the assumptioin that part or all of the trajectories in the position file were initially arranged in a row oriented 2 D array or gridswarm The evolution of this gridswarm array is depicted as a rectangular grid at the initial time and as a deformed grid at other specified times The gridswarm being plotted can have any orientation in 3D space although the means to create arbitrarily oriented gridswarms when RIP is used in trajectory calculation mode are limited Creative use of the 3D grid of trajectories capability descirbed above under the description of zktraj can be used to initialize horizontal gridswarms of arbitrary horizontal orientation but on constant vertical levels e feld circle This representation shows the trajectories as circles located at the positions of the trajectories at the current plotting time in which the diameter of the circles is proportional to the net ascent of the trajectories in terms of the chosen vertical coordinate during the specified time interval It is only available as a horizontal trajectory plot ptyp ht See Keywords in Appendix A in the full RIP User s Guide for more details on optional keywords that affect trajectory plots c Printing out trajectory positions Sometimes you may want to examine the conte
74. run a version of MPI is required prior to building the WRF NMM A version of mpich for LINUX PCs can be downloaded from http www unix mcs anl gov mpi mpich The user may want their system administrator to install the code To determine whether MPI is available on your computer system try which mpif90 which mpicc WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 3 which mpirun If all of these executables are defined MPI is probably already available The MPI lib include and bin need to be included in the user s path Three libraries are required by the WPS ungrib program for GRIB Edition 2 compression support Users are encouraged to engage their system administrators support for the installation of these packages so that traditional library paths and include paths are maintained Paths to user installed compression libraries are handled in the configure wps file by the COMPRESSION_LIBS and COMPRESSION_INC variables As an alternative to manually editing the COMPRESSION_LIBS and COMPRESSION_INC variables in the configure wps file users may set the environment variables JASPERLIB and JASPERINC to the directories holding the JasPer library and include files before configuring the WPS for example if the JasPer libraries were installed in usr local jasper 1 900 1 one might use the following commands in csh or tcsh setenv JASPERLIB usr local jasper 1 900 1 ib setenv JASPERINC usr local jasper 1 900 1 include If the zlib and PNG libraries
75. scattering When used in high resolution simulations sloping and shadowing effects may be considered ra_sw_physics 1 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM b Goddard shortwave Two stream multi band scheme with ozone from climatology and cloud effects 2 c GFDL shortwave Eta operational scheme Two stream multi band scheme with ozone from climatology and cloud effects 99 This scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP Note If itis desired to run GFDL with a microphysics scheme other than Ferrier a modification to module_ra_gfdleta F is needed to comment out define FERRIER_GFDL d Modified GFDL shortwave Similar to the GFDL shortwave c but modified to be suitable for tropics 98 This scheme is well tested and used operationally at NCEP for HWRF New in Version 3 2 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 7 e CAM scheme from the CAM 3 climate model used in CCSM Allows for aerosols and trace gases 3 f RRTMG shortwave A new shortwave scheme with the MCICA method of random cloud overlap 4 New in Version 3 1 g New Goddard scheme 5 Efficient multiple bands ozone from climatology New in Version 3 3 h Fu Liou Gu scheme 7 multiple bands cloud and cloud fraction effects ozone profile from climatology can allow for aerosols New in Version 3 4 i Held Suarez relaxation A temperature relaxation scheme designed for idealized tests only 31 j swrad_scat
76. scattering turning parameter for ra_sw_physics 1 Default value is 1 which is equivalent to 1 e 5 m kg When the value is greater than 1 it increases the scattering Input to radiation options a CAM Green House Gases Provides yearly green house gases from 1765 to 2500 The option is activated by compiling WRF with the macro DCLWRFGHG added in configure wrf Once compiled CAM RRTM and RRTMG long wave schemes will see these gases Five scenario files are available from IPCC ARS CAMtr_volume_mixing_ratio RCP4 5 CAMtr_volume_mixing_ratio RCP6 and CAMtr_volume_mixing_ratio RCP8 5 from IPCC AR4 CAMtr_volume_mixing_ratio AIB and CAMtr_volume_mixing_ratio A2 The default points to the RCP8 5 file New in Version 3 5 b Climatological ozone and aerosol data for RRTMG The ozone data is adapted from CAM radiation ra_ _physics 3 and it has latitudinal 2 82 degrees height and temporal monthly variation as opposed to the default ozone used in the scheme that only varies with height This is activated by the namelist option o3input 2 The aerosol data is based on Tegen et al 1997 which has 6 types organic carbon black carbon sulfate sea salt dust and stratospheric aerosol volcanic ash which is zero The data also has spatial 5 degrees in longitude and 4 degrees in latitudes and temporal monthly variations The option is activated by the namelist option aer_opt 1 New in Version 3 5 c Aerosol input for RRTMG a
77. scheme 8 BouLac TKE 9 Bretherton Park UW TKE scheme use with sf_sfclay_physics 1 2 10 TEMF scheme 12 GBM TKE type scheme ARW only use sf_sfclay_physics 1 99 MRE scheme to be removed nphs max_dom This flag is only for WRF NMM core Number of fundamental time steps between calls to turbulence and microphysics It can be defined as nphs x dt where dt is the time step s and x is typically in the range of 60s to 180s Traditionally it has been an_even_number which may be a consequence of portions of horizontal advection only being called every other time step topo_wind max_dom 1 turn on topographic surface wind correction Jimenez requires extra input from geogrid and works with YSU PBL scheme only 0 off WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 33 Variable Names Value Example Description default bl_mynn_tkebudget p adds MYNN tke budget terms to output cu_physics max_dom Cumulus scheme options 0 No cumulus scheme Well tested for WRF NMM 1 Kain Fritsch scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 2 Betts Miller Janjic scheme Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 3 Grell Devenyi ensemble scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 4 Simplified Arakawa Schubert scheme 2010 operational HWRF scheme 14 New GFS SAS from YSU ARW only 5 Grell 3d ensemble scheme 6 Tiedke scheme 7 Zhang McFarlane from CESM works
78. scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP c Grell Devenyi ensemble scheme Multi closure multi parameter ensemble method with typically 144 sub grid members moved to option 93 in V3 5 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM e Simplified Arakawa Schubert scheme 4 Simple mass flux scheme with quasi equilibrium closure with shallow mixing scheme and momentum transport in NMM only Adapted for ARW in Version 3 3 f Grell 3D is an improved version of the GD scheme that may also be used on high resolution in addition to coarser resolutions if subsidence spreading option cugd_avedx is turned on 5 New in Version 3 0 g Tiedtke scheme U of Hawaii version 6 Mass flux type scheme with CAPE removal time scale shallow component and momentum transport New in Version 3 3 h Zhang McFarlane scheme 7 Mass flux CAPE removal type deep convection from CESM climate model with momentum transport New in Version 3 3 i New Simplified Arakawa Schubert 14 New mass flux scheme with deep and shallow components and momentum transport New in Version 3 3 j New Simplified Arakawa Schubert 84 New mass flux scheme with deep and shallow components and momentum transport New in Version 3 4 This scheme is well tested for HWRF used operationally at NCEP WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 17 k Grell Freitas GF scheme 3 An improved GD scheme that tries to smooth the transition to clo
79. set of land use categories based on the MODIS land cover classification of the International Geosphere Biosphere Programme and modified for the Noah land surface model Although the MODIS based data contain 20 categories of land use these categories are not a subset of the 24 USGS categories users interested in the specific categories in either data set can find a listing of the land use classes in the section on land use and soil categories It must be emphasized that the MODIS based categories should only be used with the Noah land surface model in WRF The 20 category MODIS based land use data may be selected instead of the USGS data at run time through the geog_data_res variable in the geogrid namelist record This is accomplished by prefixing each resolution of static data with the string modis _30s For example in a three domain configuration where the geog_data_res variable would ordinarily be specified as geog data_res 10m 2m 30s the user should instead specify WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 15 geog data_res modis 30s 10m modis 30s 2m modis 30s 30s The effect of this change is to instruct the geogrid program to look in each entry of the GEOGRID TBL file for a resolution of static data with a resolution denoted by modis_ 30s and if such a resolution is not available to instead look for a resolution denoted by the string following the Thus for the GEOGRID T
80. sigma surface DIFFUSION H RATE S S 182 107 Surface wind gust SFC WIND GUST 180 1 Convective precipitation rate CONV PRECIP RATE 214 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 23 Radar reflectivity at certain above RADAR REFL AGL 211 105 ground heights MAPS Sea Level Pressure MAPS SLP 2 102 Total soil moisture TOTAL SOIL MOISTURE _ 86 112 Plant canopy surface water PLANT CANOPY SFC 223 1 WTR Accumulated storm surface runoff ACM STORM SFC RNOFF 235 1 Accumulated baseflow runoff ACM BSFL GDWR RNOFEF 234 1 Fraction of frozen precipitation FROZEN FRAC CLD 194 1 SCHM GSD Cloud Base pressure GSD CLD BOT PRESSURE 1 2 GSD Cloud Top pressure GSD CLD TOP PRESSURE 1 3 Averaged temperature tendency AVE GRDSCL RN 241 109 from grid scale latent heat release TMPTDY Averaged temperature tendency AVE CNVCT RN TMPTDY 242 109 from convective latent heat release Average snow phase change heat AVE SNO PHSCNG HT FX 229 1 flux Accumulated potential ACC POT EVAPORATION 228 1 evaporation Highest freezing level relative HIGHEST FRZ LVL RH 52 204 humidity Maximum wind pressure level MAX WIND PRESS 1 6 LEVEL Maximum wind height MAX WIND HGHT LEVEL 7 6 U component of maximum wind U COMP MAX WIND 33 6 V component of maximum wind V COMP MAX WIND 34 6 GSD cloud base height GSD CLD BOT HEIGHT 7 2 GSD
81. snow processes including destructive metamorphism densification process due to snow load and snow melting which substantially enhances the model s ability for the cold season study To use this option ra_lw_physics and ra_sw_physics should be set to either 1 3 or 4 The second full model level should be set to no larger than 0 982 so that the height of that level is higher than vegetation height New in Version 3 4 h CLM4 Community Land Model Version 4 Oleson et al 2010 Lawrence et al 2010 CLM4 was developed at the National Center for Atmospheric Research with many external collaborators and represents a state of the science land surface process model It contains sophisticated treatment of biogeophysics hydrology biogeochemistry and dynamic vegetation In CLM4 the land surface in each model grid cell is characterized into five primary sub grid land cover types glacier lake wetland urban and vegetated The vegetated sub grid consists of up to 4 plant functional types PFTs that differ in physiology and structure The WRF input land cover types are translated into the CLM4 PFTs through a look up table The CLM4 vertical structure includes a single layer vegetation canopy a five layer snowpack and a ten layer soil column An earlier version of CLM has been quantitatively evaluated within WRF in Jin and Wen 2012 JGR Atmosphere Lu and Kueppers 2012 JGR Atmosphere and Subin et al 2011 Earth Interactions from Jin Ne
82. the Registry file see Registry EM or Registry NMM _NEST files in the Registry subdirectory of the main WRF V3 directory UPP is written to process a single forecast hour therefore having a single forecast per output file is optimal However UPP can be run across multiple forecast times in a WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 7 single output file to extract a specified forecast hour Note It is necessary to re compile the WRF model source code after modifying the Registry file Table 1 List of all possible fields read in by unipost for the WRF NMM T SFCEXC NRDSW U VEGFRC ARDSW V ACSNOW ALWIN Q ACSNOM ALWOUT CWM CMC NRDLW F_ICE SST ARDLW F_RAIN EXCH_H ALWTOA F_RIMEF EL_MYJ ASWTOA W THZO TGROUND PINT QZO SOILTB PT UZO TWBS PDTOP VZO SFCSHX FIS QS NSRFC SMC ZO ASRFC SH20 PBLH QWBS STC USTAR SFCLHX CFRACH AKHS_ OUT GRNFLX CFRACL AKMS_OUT SUBSHX CFRACM THS POTEVP SLDPTH PREC WEASD U10 CUPREC SNO V10 ACPREC SI TH10 CUPPT PCTSNO Q10 LSPA IVGTYP TSHLTR CLDEFI ISLTYP QSHLTR HTOP ISLOPE PSHLTR HBOT SM SMSTAV HTOPD SICE SMSTOT HBOTD ALBEDO ACFRCV HTOPS ALBASE ACFRST HBOTS GLAT RLWTT SR XLONG RSWTT RSWIN GLON AVRAIN CZEN DX_NMM AVCNVC CZMEAN NPHSO TCUCN RSWOUT NCLOD TRAIN RLWIN NPREC NCFRCV SIGT4 NHEAT WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 8 NCFRST RADOT SFROFEF ASWIN UDROFF AS
83. the center point of the coarse domain by default i e when ref_x and ref_y are not specified For NMM ref_1lon always gives the longitude to which the origin is rotated For both ARW and NMM west longitudes are negative and the value of ref_1on should be in the range 180 180 No default value 15 REF_X A real value specifying the 1 part of an i j location whose latitude longitude location in the simulation domain is known The i j location is always given with respect to the mass staggered grid whose dimensions are one less than the dimensions of the unstaggered grid Default value is E_WE 1 1 2 E_WE 2 16 REF_Y A real value specifying the j part of an i j location whose latitude longitude location in the simulation domain is known The i j location is always given with respect to the mass staggered grid whose dimensions are one less than the dimensions of the unstaggered grid Default value is E_ SN 1 1 2 E_SN 2 17 TRUELATI A real value specifying for ARW the first true latitude for the Lambert conformal projection or the only true latitude for the Mercator and polar stereographic projections For NMM truelat1 is ignored No default value 18 TRUELAT2 A real value specifying for ARW the second true latitude for the Lambert conformal conic projection For all other projections truelat2 is ignored No default value 19 STAND_LON A rea
84. the other static geographical data sets e g topo_30s soiltype_top_30s etc used by geogrid since doing so will eliminate the need to modify the GEOGRID TBL file If the landuse_30s_with_lakes and modis_landuse_21class_30s directories are placed in a location different from the other static data sets it will be necessary to change the paths to these directories from relative paths to absolute paths in the GEOGRID TBL file 2 Before running geogrid change the specification of geog_data_res in the sgeogrid namelist record to specify either the USGS based or the MODIS based land use data with inland water bodies For example in a two domain configuration setting geog data_res usgs_lakes 10m usgs_lakest2m would tell geogrid to use the USGS based land use data for both domains and to use the 10 minute resolution data for other static fields in domain 1 and the 2 minute resolution data for other static fields in domain 2 for MODIS based data usgs_lakes should be replaced by modis_ lakes Running geogrid should result in output files that use a separate category for inland water bodies instead of the general water category used for oceans and seas The lake category is identified by the global attribute ISLAKE in the geogrid output files this attribute should be set to either 28 in the case of USGS based data or 21 in the case of the MODIS based data See e g the list of WPS output fields where a value of 1 for ISLAKE indic
85. the parent domain Use 1 for the coarsest grid WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 28 Variable Names Value Description Example parent_grid_ratio 3 Parent to nest domain grid size ratio For WRF max_dom NMM this ratio must be 3 parent_time_step_ratio 3 Parent to nest time step ratio For WRF NMM max_dom this ratio must be 3 feedback 1 Feedback from nest to its parent domain 0 no feedback smooth_option 0 no smoothing 1 2 1 smoothing option for parent domain used only with feedback 1 2 default smoothing desmoothing option for parent domain used only with feedback 1 num_moves 99 0 Stationary nest 99 Vortex following moving nest throughout the entire simulation This flag is only for the HWRF configuration tile_sz_x Number of points in tile x direction tile_sz_y Number of points in tile y direction numtiles Number of tiles per patch alternative to above two items nproc_x 1 Number of processors in x direction for decomposition nproc_y 1 Number of processors in y direction for decomposition If 1 code will do automatic decomposition If gt 1 for both will be used for decomposition amp physics Physics options chem_opt 0 Chemistry option not yet available mp_physics max_dom Microphysics options 0 no microphysics 1 Kessler scheme 2 Lin et al scheme 3 WSM 3 class simple ice scheme 4 WSM 5 class scheme Preliminarily tested for W
86. the time when the restart file is valid When one starts the restart run the namelist input file needs to be modified so that the start_ time will be set to the restart time which is the time the restart file is written The other namelist variable that must be set is restart this variable should be set to true for a restart run In summary these namelists should be modified WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 43 start_ end_ start and end times for restart model integration restart logical to indicate whether the run is a restart or not Hint Typically the restart file is a lot bigger in size than the history file hence one may find that even it is ok to write a single model history output time to a file in netCDF format frame_per_outfile 1 it may fail to write a restart file This is because the basic netCDF file support is only 2Gb There are two solutions to the problem The first is to simply set namelist option io_form_restart 102 instead of 2 and this will force the restart file to be written into multiple pieces one per processor As long as one restarts the model using the same number of processors this option works well and one should restart the model with the same number of processors in any case The second solution is to recompile the code using the netCDF large file support option see section on Installing WRF in this chapter Configuring a run with multiple domains WRF NMM V2 2 supports stationa
87. the user must install for various observation types and linear algebra solvers Similarly the WPS package separate from the WRF source code has additional external libraries that must be built in support of Grib2 processing The one external package that all of the systems require is the netCDF library which is one of the supported I O API packages The netCDF libraries and source code are available from the Unidata homepage at http www unidata ucar edu select DOWNLOADS registration required The WRF model has been successfully ported to a number of Unix based machines WRE developers do not have access to all of them and must rely on outside users and vendors to supply the required configuration information for the compiler and loader options Below is a list of the supported combinations of hardware and software for WRF WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 1 Vendor Hardware OS Compiler Cray XC30 Intel Linux Intel Cray XE AMD Linux Intel IBM Power Series AIX vendor IBM Intel Linux Intel PGI gfortran SGI IA64 Opteron Linux Intel Intel PGI COTS IA32 Linux gfortran g95 PathScale Intel PGI COTS 1A64 Opteron Linux gfortran PathScale Mac Power Series Darwin xlf g95 PGI Intel Mae Intel Dasa gfortran PGI Intel NEC NEC Linux vendor Fujitsu FX10 Intel Linux vendor Commercial Off The Shelf systems The WRF model may be built to run on a single processor machine a shared memory machine that use the OpenMP
88. 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_12 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_15 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_18 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_21 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 24_00 00 00 The convention is to use met_nmm to signify data that are output from the WPS and used as input into the real_nmm exe program The d01 part of the name is used to identify to which domain this data refers The trailing characters are the date where each WPS output file has only a single time slice of processed data The WPS package delivers data that are ready to be used in the WRF NMM system The following statements apply to these data e The data adheres to the WRF IO API e The data has already been horizontally interpolated to the correct grid point staggering for each variable and the winds are correctly rotated to the WRF model map projection e 3 D meteorological data required from the WPS pressure u v temperature relative humidity geopotential height e Optional 3 D hydrometeor data may be provided to the real program at run time but these fields will not be used in the coarse grid lateral boundary file Fields named QR QC QS QI QG QH QNI mixing ratio for rain cloud snow ice graupel hail and number concentration are eligible for input from the metgrid output files e 3D soil data from the WPS soil temperature soil moisture soil liquid optional depending on physics choices in the WRF model e 2D meteorological data from the WPS
89. 03 and deep soil temperature Pleim and Gilliam 2009 Users should recognize that the PX LSM was primarily developed for retrospective simulation where surface based observations are available to inform the indirect soil nudging While soil nudging can be disabled using the FDDA namelist input setting pxlsm_soil_nudge little testing has been done in this mode although some users have reported reasonable results Gilliam and Pleim 2010 discuss the implementation in the WRF model and provide typical configurations for retrospective applications If soil nudging is activated modelers must use the Obsgrid objective re analysis utility to produce a surface nudging file with the naming convention wrfsfdda_d0O Obsgrid takes WPS met_em files and LittleR observation files and produces the wrfsfdda_dO file The PX LSM uses 2 m temperature and mixing ratio re analyses from this file for the deep soil moisture and temperature nudging If modelers want to test PX LSM in forecast mode with soil nudging activated forecasted 2 m temperature and mixing ratio can be used with empty observation files to produce the wrfsfdda_dO files using Obsgrid but results will be tied to the governing forecast model e GFDL slab model Used together with GFDL surface layer scheme 88 This scheme is well tested and used operationally at NCEP for HWRF New in Version 3 2 f Noah MP multi physics Land Surface Model uses multiple options for key land
90. 0M 13 105 10 M specific humidity SPEC HUM AT 10 M 51 105 Surface pressure SURFACE PRESSURE 1 1 Terrain height SURFACE HEIGHT 7 1 Skin potential temperature SURFACE POT TEMP 13 1 Skin specific humidity SURFACE SPEC HUMID 51 1 Skin dew point temperature SURFACE DEWPOINT 17 1 Skin Relative humidity SURFACE REL HUMID 52 1 Skin temperature SFC SKIN TEMPRATUR 11 1 Soil temperature at the bottom of BOTTOM SOIL TEMP 85 111 soil layers Soil temperature in between each SOIL TEMPERATURE 85 112 of soil layers Soil moisture in between each of SOIL MOISTURE 144 112 soil layers Snow water equivalent SNOW WATER 65 1 EQUIVALNT Snow cover in percentage PERCENT SNOW COVER 238 1 Heat exchange coeff at surface SFC EXCHANGE COEF 208 1 Vegetation cover GREEN VEG COVER 87 1 Soil moisture availability SOIL MOISTURE AVAIL 207 112 Ground heat flux instantaneous INST GROUND HEAT FLX 155 1 Lifted index surface based LIFTED INDEX SURFCE 131 101 Lifted index best LIFTED INDEX BEST 132 116 Lifted index from boundary LIFTED INDEX 24 116 layer BNDLYR CAPE CNVCT AVBL POT 157 1 ENRGY CIN CNVCT INHIBITION 156 1 Column integrated precipitable PRECIPITABLE WATER 54 200 water Column integrated cloud water TOTAL COLUMN CLD 136 200 WTR Column integrated cloud ice TOTAL COLUMN CLD 137 200 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 19 ICE
91. 103 Virtual temperature based TV CNVCT AVBL POT EN 202 1 convective available potential energy Virtual temperature based TV CNVCT INHIBITION 201 1 convective inhibition Ventilation rate VENTILATION RATE 241 220 Haines index HAINES INDEX 250 1 Simulated GOES 12 channel 2 GOESE TB 2 NON NADIR 213 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Simulated GOES 12 channel 3 GOESE TB 3 NON NADIR 214 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Simulated GOES 12 channel 4 GOESE TB 4 NON NADIR 215 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Simulated GOES 12 channel 5 GOESE TB 5 NON NADIR 216 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 30 Simulated GOES 11 channel 2 GOESW TB 2 NON NADIR 241 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Simulated GOES 11 channel 3 GOESW TB 3 NON NADIR 242 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Simulated GOES 11 channel 4 GOESW TB 4 NON NADIR 243 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Simulated GOES 11 channel 5 GOESW TB 5 NON NADIR 244 8 brightness temperature with satellite angle correction Pressure at flight levels PRESS AT FD HEIGHTS 1 103 Simulated AMSR E channel 9 AMSRE TB CH 9 176 8 brightness temperature Simulated AMSR E channel 10 AMSR
92. 1994 MWR 2000 3 GFS Hong and Pan 1996 MWR 2005 4 QNSE Sukoriansky Galperin and Perov 2005 BLM 2009 5 MYNN2 Nakanishi and Niino 2006 BLM 2009 6 MYNN3 Nakanishi and Niino 2006 BLM 2009 7 ACM2 Pleim 2007 JAMC 2008 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 15 8 BouLac Bougeault and Lacarrere 1989 MWR 9 UW Bretherton and Park 2009 JC 10 TEMF Angevine Jiang and Mauriten 2010 MWR 12 GBM Grenier and Bretherton 2001 MWR 99 MRF Hong and Pan 1996 MWR Scheme Cores WRF NMM V3 User s Guide sf _Sfclay_ Prognostic Diagnostic variables variables EL_MYJ exch_h exch_m Q Tsq Qsq Cov exch_h exch_m QKE Tsq Qsq Cov EL_PBL exch_h exch_m wu_tur wv_tur wt_tur wq_tur 2009 2011 2011 2013 2000 Cloud mixing B TKE_PBL EL_MYJ exch_h QC QI E B 5 16 MRF ARW 1 QC QI NMM Cumulus Parameterization cu_physics a Kain Fritsch scheme Deep and shallow convection sub grid scheme using a mass flux approach with downdrafts and CAPE removal time scale cu_physics 1 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM kfeta_trigger default trigger 2 moisture advection modulated trigger function based on Ma and Tan 2009 Atmospheric Research May improve results in subtropical regions when large scale forcing is weak b Betts Miller Janjic scheme Operational Eta scheme Column moist adjustment scheme relaxing towards a well mixed profile 2 This
93. 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 10 2 10 3 1 3 2 3 4 4 12 3 15 3 16 317 3 19 3 21 3 3 23 3 26 3 26 3 28 3 30 500 3 39 3 42 3 45 Available Interpolation Options in Geogrid and Metgrid Land Use and Soil Categories in the Static Data WPS Output Fields 4 WRFE NMM Initialization Introduction Initialization for Real Data Cases Running real_nmm exe 5 WRF NMM Model Introduction WRF NMM Dynamics o Time stepping o Advection o Diffusion o Divergence damping Physics Options Microphysics Longwave Radiation Shortwave Radiation Surface Layer Land Surface Planetary Boundary Layer o Cumulus Parameterization Other Physics Options Other Dynamics Options Operational Configuration Description of Namelist Variables How to Run WRF for NMM core Restart Run Configuring a Run with Multiple Domains Using Digital Filter Initialization Using sst_update Option Using IO Quilting Real Data Test Case List of Fields in WRF NMM Output Extended Reference List for WRF NMM Core oO 0 0 0O 0 0 6 WRE Software WRE Build Mechanism Registry T O Applications Program Interface I O API Timekeeping Software Documentation Performance WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 49 3 52 3 54 4 1 4 3 5 1 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 5 6 5 11 5 11 5 14 5 17 5 19 5 21 5 22 5 22 5 42 5 43 5 44 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 49 5 49 5 55 6 1 6 5 6 14 6 14 6 15 6 15 ii 7 Post Processing Utilities NCEP Unified Post
94. 3 DOMAINPATH directory where UPP will be run from WRFPATH path to your WRFV3 build defaults to the environment variable used during the installation with the configure script UNI_POST_HOME path to your UPPV2 1 build POSTEXEC path to your UPPV2 1 executables WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 12 Note The scripts are configured such that wnipost expects the WRF history files wrfout files to be in wrfprd the wrf_cntrl parm file to be in parm and the postprocessor working directory to called postprd all under DOMAINPATH 2 Specify dynamic core being run NMM or ARW 3 Specify the forecast cycles to be post processed startdate YY YYMMDDHH of forecast cycle Shr first forecast hour lastfhr last forecast hour incrementhr increment in hours between forecast files Do not set to 0 or the script will loop continuously 4 Set naming convention for prefix and extension of output file name i comsp is the initial string of the output file name by default it is not set and the prefix of the output file will be the string set in wrf_cntrl parm DATSET if set it will concatenate the setting to the front of the string specified in wrf_cntrl parm DATSET ii tmmark is used for the file extension in run_unipost tnmark tm00 if not set it is set to GrbF 5 Set up how many domains will be post processed For runs with a single domain use for domain d01 For runs with multiple domains use for domain d01 d02
95. 40100 FieldType 104 W MemoryOrder XY sunits K description T 40 100 cm below ground layer stagger M ISE XSI Sr yo luz float ST010040 Time south _ north west_east ST010040 ST010040 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY 3 59 STO010040 units K ST010040 description Upper STO010040 stagger M STO10040 sr x 1 STO10040 sr y 1 7 ST000010 Time ST000010 FieldType ST000010 MemoryOrder ST000010 units K ST000010 description float 104 w XY LA Upper ST000010 stagger M STOO0OI0 5 x 1 7 ST000010 sr_y 1 SM100200 Time SM100200 FieldType 104 SM100200 MemoryOrder XY SM100200 units kg m 3 S 100200 description float layer M100200 stagger M M100200 sr x 1 M100200 sr y 1 M040100 Time M040100 float FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units kg m 3 description ANNNADMWNNWNN layer stagger M FSER SL SE oy s 1h Time FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units kg m 3 description float ANNNADWNNNN layer 01004 01004 01 M00001 00001 00001 100001 00001 stagger M sr x 1 sr y 1 Time FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units kg m 3 description je je A float W ANNNDWNNANN DOO Ce COCO layer Up e SM000010 stagger M SM000010 sr
96. 51 100 surface Deep convective tendency on DCNVCT TNDY ONP SF 242 100 pressure surface Shallow convective tendency on S CNVCT TNDY ON PSF 244 100 pressure surface Grid scale tendency on pressure GRDSCL TNDY ON P SFC 241 100 surface VDIFF MOIS ON P SFCS 249 100 Deep convective moisture on D CNVCT MOIS ON P SF 243 100 pressure surface Shallow convective moisture on S CNVCT MOIS ONP SF 245 100 pressure surface Ozone tendency on pressure OZONE TNDY ON P SFCS 188 100 surface Mass weighted potential vorticity MASS WEIGHTED PV 139 100 Simulated GOES 12 channel 3 GOES BRIGHTNESS CH 3 221 8 brightness count Simulated GOES 12 channel 4 GOES BRIGHTNESS CH 4 222 8 brightness count Omega on theta surface OMEGA ON THETA SFCS 39 113 Mixing height MIXHT HEIGHT 67 1 Average clear sky incoming AVE CLR INC SFC LW 163 1 longwave at surface Average clear sky incoming AVE CLR INC SFC SW 161 1 shortwave at surface Average clear sky outgoing AVE CLR OUT SFC LW 162 1 longwave at surface Average clear sky outgoing AVE CLR OUT TOA LW 162 8 longwave at top of atmosphere Average clear sky outgoing AVE CLR OUT SFC SW 160 1 shortwave at surface Average clear sky outgoing AVE CLR OUT TOA SW 160 8 shortwave at top of atmosphere Average incoming shortwave at AVE INC TOA SW 204 8 top of atmosphere Tranport wind u component TRANSPORT U WIND 33 220 Transport wind v component TRANSPORT V WIND 34 220 Sunshine duration SUNSHINE DURATION 191
97. ADS control files are available from http www cpc ncep noaa gov products wesley grib2ctl html The GrADS package is available from http grads iges org grads grads html GrADS has an online User s Guide at http grads iges org grads gadoc and a list of basic commands for GrADS can be found at http grads iges org grads gadoc reference_card pdf A sample script named run_unipostandgrads which is included in the scripts directory of the Unified Post Processing package can be used to run unipost copygb and plot the following fields using GrADS Sfcmaphh_dnn_GRADS gif mean SLP and 6 hour accumulated precipitation 850mbRHhh_dnn_GRADS gif 850 mb relative humidity 850mbTempandWindhh_dnn_GRADS gif 850 mb temperature and wind vectors 500mbHandVorthh_dnn_GRADS gif 500 mb geopotential heights and absolute vorticity e 250mbWindandHhh_dnn_GRADS gif 250 mb wind speed isotacs and geopotential heights In order to use the script run_unipostandgrads it is necessary to 1 Set the environmental variable GADDIR to the path of the GrADS fonts and auxiliary files For example setenv GADDIR usr local grads data 2 Add the location of the GrADS executables to the PATH For example setenv PATH usr ocal grads bin PATH WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 16 3 Link script cbar gs to the post processor working directory This scripts is provided in UPP package and the run_unipostandgrads script makes a link from scripts to post
98. BL entry for the LANDUSFF field the MODIS based land use data which is identified with the string modis_ 30s would be used instead of the 10m 2m and 30s resolutions of USGS data in the example above for all other fields the 10m 2m and 30s resolutions would be used for the first second and third domains respectively As an aside when none of the resolutions specified for a domain in geog_data_res are found ina GEOGRID TBL entry the resolution denoted by default will be used Selecting Static Data for the Gravity Wave Drag Scheme The gravity wave drag by orography GWDO scheme in the NMM available in version 3 1 requires fourteen static fields from the WPS In fact these fields will be interpolated by the geogrid program regardless of whether the GWDO scheme will be used in the model When the GWDO scheme will not be used the fields will simply be ignored in WRE and the user need not be concerned with the resolution of data from which the fields are interpolated However it is recommended that these fields be interpolated from a resolution of source data that is slightly lower i e coarser in resolution than the model grid consequently if the GWDO scheme will be used care should be taken to select an appropriate resolution of GWDO static data Currently five resolutions of GWDO static data are available 2 degree 1 degree 30 minute 20 minute and 10 minute denoted by the strings
99. D TBL file the path should not contain the actual file name as METGRID TBL is assumed but should only give the path where this file is located Default value is metgrid 6 OPT_IGNORE_DOM_CENTER A logical value either TRUE or FALSE specifying whether for times other than the initial time interpolation of meteorological fields to points on the interior of the simulation domain should be avoided in order to decrease the runtime of metgrid This option currently has no effect Default value is FALSE Description of GEOGRID TBL Options The GEOGRID TBL file is a text file that defines parameters of each of the data sets to be interpolated by geogrid Each data set is defined in a separate section with sections being delimited by a line of equality symbols e g Within each section there are specifications each of which has the form of keyword value Some keywords are required in each data set section while others are optional some keywords are mutually exclusive with other keywords Below the possible keywords and their expected range of values are described 1 NAME A character string specifying the name that will be assigned to the interpolated field upon output No default value 2 PRIORITY An integer specifying the priority that the data source identified in the table section takes with respect to other sources of data for the same field If a field has n sources of data then the
100. DATA CAM_AEROPT_DATA co2_trans ETAMPNEW_DATA ETAMPNEW_DATA_DBL ETAMPNEW_DATA expanded_rain GENPARM TBL Grib2map tbl gribmap txt LANDUSE TBL MPTABLE TBL namelist input WRF V3 test nmm_real ozone formatted ozone_lat formatted real_nmm exe RRTM_DATA_DBL RRTMG_LW_DATA RRTMG_LW_DATA_DBL RRTMG_SW_DATA RRTMG_SW_DATA_DBL SOILPARM TBL WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 4 3 tr49t85 tr67t85 URBPARM TBL URBPARM_UZE TBL VEGPARM TBL wrf exe 3 Make sure the met_nmm d01 files from the WPS either reside in or are linked to the working directory chosen to run the model If nest s were run also link in the geo_nmm_nest file s 4 Edit the namelist input file in the working directory for dates domain size time step output options and physics options see Chapter 5 Description of Namelist Variables section for details 5 The command issued to run real_nmm exe in the working directory will depend on the operating system On LINUX MPI systems the command is DM parallel build or Serial build mpirun np n real_nmm exe real_nmm exe gt amp real_nmm out where n defines the number of processors to use For batch jobs on some IBM systems such as NCAR s IBM the command is mpirun I sf real_nmm exe and for interactive runs Interactive MPI job is not an option on NCAR IBMs the command is mpirun lsf real_nmm exe rmpool 1 procs n where n stands for the number of processors CPUs to be used When r
101. Default value is null i e no dominant category will be computed from the fractional categorical field 17 DF_DX When d _ dx is assigned a character string value the effect is to cause geogrid to compute the directional derivative of the field in the x direction using a central difference along the interior of the domain or a one sided difference at the boundary of the domain the derivative field will be named according to the character string assigned to the keyword df_dx Default value is null i e no derivative field is computed 18 DF_DY When d _ dy is assigned a character string value the effect is to cause geogrid to compute the directional derivative of the field in the y direction using a central WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 41 difference along the interior of the domain or a one sided difference at the boundary of the domain the derivative field will be named according to the character string assigned to the keyword df_dy Default value is null i e no derivative field is computed 19 Z_DIM_NAME For 3 dimensional output fields a character string giving the name of the vertical dimension or z dimension A continuous field may have multiple levels and thus be a 3 dimensional field and a categorical field may take the form of a 3 dimensional field if it is written out as fractional fields for each category No default value Description of index Options Related to the GEOGRID TBL are the index files that are
102. E TB CH 10 177 8 brightness temperature Simulated AMSR E channel 11 AMSRE TB CH 11 178 8 brightness temperature Simulated AMSR E channel 12 AMSRE TB CH 12 179 8 brightness temperature SSMI channel 4 brightness SSMI TB CH 4 176 8 temperature SSMI channel 5 brightness SSMI TB CH 5 177 8 temperature SSMI channel 6 brightness SSMI TB CH 6 178 8 temperature SSMI channel 7 brightness SSMI TB CH 7 179 8 temperature Time averaged percentage snow TIME AVG PCT SNW CVR 238 1 cover Time averaged surface pressure TIME AVG SFC PRESS 1 1 Time averaged 10m temperature TIME AVG TMP AT 10M 11 105 Time averaged mass exchange TAVG MASS EXCH COEF 185 1 coefficient Time averaged wind exchange TAVG WIND EXCH COEF 186 1 coefficient Temperature at 10m TEMP AT 10M 11 105 Maximum U component wind at U COMP MAX 10M WIND 253 105 10m Maximum V component wind at V COMP MAX 10M WIND 254 105 10m WRF NMM V3 User s Guide RIP4 RIP Introduction RIP which stands for Read Interpolate Plot is a Fortran program that invokes NCAR Graphics routines for the purpose of visualizing output from gridded meteorological data sets primarily from mesoscale numerical models It can also be used to visualize model input or analyses on model grids RIP has been under continuous development since 1991 primarily by Mark Stoelinga at both NCAR and the University of Washington It was original
103. EFL 166 200 Composite radar reflectivity from COMPOSITE CONV REFL 167 200 convection Rain radar reflecting angle RAIN RADAR REFL AGL 165 105 Ice radar reflecting angle ICE RADAR REFL AGL 166 105 Convection radar reflecting angle CONV RADAR REFL AGL 167 105 Model level vertical velocity W WIND ON P SFCS 40 100 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 26 Column integrated super cool TOTAL COLD LIQUID 168 200 liquid water Column integrated melting ice TOTAL MELTING ICE 169 200 Height of lowest level super cool COLD LIQ BOT HEIGHT 7 253 liquid water Height of highest level super cool COLD LIQ TOP HEIGHT 7 254 liquid water Richardson number planetary RICH NO PBL HEIGHT 7 220 boundary layer height Total column shortwave TOT COL SW T TNDY 250 200 temperature tendency Total column longwave TOT COL LW T TNDY 251 200 temperature tendency Total column gridded temperature TOT COL GRD T TNDY 241 200 tendency Total column convective TOT COL CNVCT T TNDY 242 200 temperature tendency Radiative flux temperature RADFLX TMP TNDY ONP 216 100 tendency on pressure level Column integrated moisture TOT COL MST CNVG 135 200 convergence Time averaged clear sky AVE CLR INC UV B SW 201 1 incoming UV B shortwave Time averaged incoming UV B AVE INC UV B SW 200 1 shortwave Total column ozone TOT COL OZONE 10 200 Average l
104. EL HUMID ON P SFCS 52 100 surface Moisture convergence on pressure MST CNVG ON P SFCS 135 100 surface U component wind on pressure U WIND ON PRESS SFCS 33 100 surface V component wind on pressure V WIND ON PRESS SFCS 34 100 surface Omega on pressure surface OMEGA ON PRESS SFCS 39 100 Absolute vorticity on pressure ABS VORT ON P SFCS 41 100 surface Geostrophic streamfunction on STRMFUNC ON P SFCS 35 100 pressure surface Turbulent kinetic energy on TRBLNT KE ON P SFCS 158 100 pressure surface Cloud water on pressure surface CLOUD WATR ON P SFCS 153 100 Cloud ice on pressure surface CLOUD ICE ON P SFCS 58 100 Rain on pressure surface RAIN ON P SFCS 170 100 Snow water on pressure surface SNOW ON P SFCS 171 100 Total condensate on pressure CONDENSATE ON P SFCS 135 100 surface Mesinger Membrane sea level MESINGER MEAN SLP 130 102 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 18 pressure Shuell sea level pressure SHUELL MEAN SLP 102 2 M pressure SHELTER PRESSURE 105 2 M temperature SHELTER 11 105 TEMPERATURE 2 M specific humidity SHELTER SPEC HUMID 51 105 2 M mixing ratio SHELTER MIX RATIO 53 105 2 M dew point temperature SHELTER DEWPOINT 17 105 2 M RH SHELTER REL HUMID 52 105 10 M u component wind U WIND AT ANEMOM HT 33 105 10 M v component wind V WIND AT ANEMOM HT 34 105 10 M potential temperature POT TEMP AT 1
105. GOES TB CH5 216 8 brightness temperature Cloud fraction on pressure surface CLD FRAC ON P SFCS 71 100 U wind on theta surface U WIND ON THETA SFCS 33 113 V wind on theta surface V WIND ON THETA SFCS 34 113 Temperature on theta surface TEMP ON THETA SFCS 11 113 Potential vorticity on theta surface PV ON THETA SFCS 4 113 Montgomery streamfunction on M STRMFUNC ON THETA 37 113 theta surface S STAB ON THETA SFCS 19 113 Relative humidity on theta surface RH ON THETA SFCS 52 113 U wind on constant PV surface U WIND ON PV SFCS 33 117 V wind on constant PV surface V WIND ON PV SFCS 34 117 Temperature on constant PV TEMP ON PV SFCS 11 117 surface Height on constant PV surface HEIGHT ON PV SFCS 7 117 Pressure on constant PV surface PRESSURE ON PV SFCS 1 117 Wind shear on constant PV SHEAR ON PV SFCS 136 117 surface Planetary boundary layer cloud PBL CLD FRACTION 71 211 fraction Average water runoff AVE WATER RUNOFF 90 1 Planetary boundary layer regime PBL REGIME 220 1 Maximum 2m temperature MAX SHELTER TEMP 15 105 Minimum 2m temperature MIN SHELTER TEMP 16 105 Maximum 2m RH MAX SHELTER RH 218 105 Minimum 2m RH MIN SHELTER RH 217 105 Ice thickness ICE THICKNESS 92 1 Shortwave tendency on pressure SW TNDY ON P SFCS 250 100 surface WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 28 Longwave tendency on pressure LW TNDY ON P SFCS 2
106. GT V HGT V HGT V HGT V HGT V HGT V FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units meters MSL description Topography height stagger V sr x 1 sr y 1 float HGT M Time south _north west _east GT _M HGT HGT HGT FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units meters MSL description Topography height stagger M sr x 1 sr y 1 float HZMAX Time south _north west_east FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units whoknows description something stagger M sr x 1 sxr y 1 float HANGL Time south north west_east Ze GNAT CG G C D ll lt a Z Q E float jam v LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP LOP HSLOP T ANNNWNN L FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units whoknows description something stagger M sr x 1 rsi y 1 LOP Time South north west_east FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units whoknows description something stagger M sr x 1 sr y 1 float HANIS Time south north west east HANIS HANIS ANIS ANIS HANIS ANIS ANIS FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units whoknows description something stagger M SrO Ly sry 1 3 float HLENNW Time south north west _ east HLENNW HLENNW HLENNW FieldType 104 HLE
107. H H H J 5 3 float ISL lt i lt te float ISL description Temperatur stagger M sr XS Lg PSE LARS L oF Time so th rth west east FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units Pa description Sea level Pressure stagger M sr x 1 PSK yos dog ECAT Time south north west east ECAT FieldType 104 LOP LOP ECAT MemoryOrder XY ECAT units category LOP LOP ECAT stagger M LOP NNNNNNN DWM UV Dy Dd yH LOP ECAT sr x 1 ECAT sr y 1 float SNOALB Time south north west east WRF NMM V3 User s Guide ECAT description Dominant category west east west east west east west_east r 3 61 n Z O D Fi eldType 104 n Z O D n Z O D SUR W MemoryOrder XY its percent n Z O D de St ESE LB sr n Z O D wW w w w w w n Z O D n Z O D float Q ea scription Maximum snow albedo agger M Se ag ak oe ENFRAC Time z dimension0012 south north west east E T T r T T T T T T aaoo D DD dD DW ye ey a AQAA A sas T T float BED D EA W RAC RAC RAC RAC RAC RAC RAC Q ra N ES FieldType 104
108. NNW MemoryOrder XY HLENNW units whoknows description something stagger M WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 63 HLENNW sr x I HLENNW sr y 1 float HLENSW Time south north west east HLENSW FieldType 104 HLENSW MemoryOrder XY HLENSW units whoknows HLENSW description something HLENSW stagger M HLENSW sr x 1 HLENSW sr y 1 float HLENS Time south north west east HLENS FieldType 104 HLENS MemoryOrder XY HLENS units whoknows HLENS description something HLENS stagger M HLENS sr x 1 HLENS sr y 1 float HLENW Time south north west_east HLENW FieldType 104 HLENW MemoryOrder XY HLENW units whoknows HLENW description something HLENW stagger M HLENW sr x 1 HLENW sr y 1 float HASYNW Time south north west _east HASYNW FieldType 104 HASYNW MemoryOrder XY HASYNW units whoknows HASYNW description something HASYNW stagger M HASYNW sr x 1 HASYNW sr_ y 1 float HASYSW Time south north west _east HASYSW FieldType 104 HASYSW MemoryOrder XY HASYSW units whoknows HASYSW description something HASYSW stagger M HASYSW sr x 1 HASYSW sr_ y 1 float HASYS Time south north west _east HASYS
109. NT Hm Zz us also SKINT SKINT SKINT Ae m g tg W MemoryOrder XY LES K description Skin temperature can use for SST stagger M sr x 1 sr y 1 float SOILHGT Time south_north west_east SOILHGT FieldType 104 SOILHGT MemoryOrder XY SOILHGT units m SOILHGT description Terrain field of source analysis SOILHGT stagger M SOILHGT sr x 1 SOILHGT sr y 1 float LANDSEA Time south north west_east ANDSEA FieldType 104 LANDSEA MemoryOrder XY LANDSEA units proprtn LANDSEA description Land Sea flag l land 0 or 2 sea LANDSEA stagger M LANDSEA sr x 1 LANDSEA sr y 1 float SEAICE Time south north west east SEAICE FieldType 104 SEAICE MemoryOrder XY SEAICE units proprtn SEAICE description Ice flag SEAICE stagger M SEAICE sr x 1 SEAICE sr y 1 float ST100200 Time south _north west east ST100200 ST100200 ST100200 ST100200 a Bottom ST100200 ST100200 ST100200 FieldType 104 W MemoryOrder XY s units K description T 100 200 cm below ground layer stagger M sr x 1 sr y 1 float ST040100 Time south _ north west_east ST040100 ST040100 ST040100 ST040100 Upper STO40100 ST040100 STO
110. Namelist variables start_ and end_ control the starting and ending time for nests When a nest is initialized its topography is obtained from the static file created for that nest level by the WPS see Chapter 3 Topography is the only field used from the static file All other information for the nest is obtained from the lower resolution parent domain Land variables such as land sea mask SST soil temperature and moisture are obtained through a nearest neighbor approach WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 44 To obtain the temperature geopotential and moisture fields for the nest initialization the first step is to use cubic splines to vertically interpolate those fields from hybrid levels to constant pressure levels in each horizontal grid point of the parent grid The second step is to bilinearly interpolate those fields in the horizontal from the parent grid to the nest The third step is to use the high resolution terrain and the geopotential to determine the surface pressure on the nest Next the pressure values in the nest hybrid surfaces are calculated The final step is to compute the geopotential temperature and moisture fields over the nest hybrid surface using a cubic spline interpolation in the vertical The zonal and meridional components of the wind are obtained by first performing a horizontal interpolation from the parent to the nest grid points using a bi linear algorithm The wind components are then interpolated in the vertic
111. O SFC SW 211 1 radiation time averaged RAD Outgoing surface longwave AVE OUTGO SFC LW 212 1 radiation time averaged RAD Outgoing model top shortwave AVE OUTGO TOA SW 211 8 radiation time averaged RAD Outgoing model top longwave AVE OUTGO TOA LW 212 8 radiation time averaged RAD Incoming surface shortwave INSTN INC SFC SW RAD 204 1 radiation instantaneous Incoming surface longwave INSTN INC SFC LW RAD 205 1 radiation instantaneous Roughness length ROUGHNESS LENGTH 83 1 Friction velocity FRICTION VELOCITY 253 1 Surface drag coefficient SFC DRAG COEFFICIENT 252 1 Surface u wind stress SFC U WIND STRESS 124 1 Surface v wind stress SFC V WIND STRESS 125 1 Surface sensible heat flux time AVE SFC SENHEAT FX 122 1 averaged Ground heat flux time averaged AVE GROUND HEAT FX 155 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 21 Surface latent heat flux time AVE SFC LATHEAT FX 121 1 averaged Surface momentum flux time AVE SFC MOMENTUM 172 1 averaged FX Accumulated surface evaporation ACC SFC EVAPORATION 57 1 Surface sensible heat flux INST SFC SENHEAT FX 122 1 instantaneous Surface latent heat flux INST SFC LATHEAT FX 121 1 instantaneous Latitude LATITUDE 176 1 Longitude LONGITUDE 177 1 Land sea mask land 1 sea 0 LAND SEA MASK 81 1 Sea ice mask SEA ICE MASK 91 1
112. RF NMM 5 Ferrier high res scheme Well tested for WRFE NMM used operationally at NCEP 6 WSM 6 class graupel scheme Preliminarily WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 29 Variable Names Value Description Example tested for WRF NMM 7 Goddard GCE scheme 8 Thompson graupel scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 9 Milbrandt Yau scheme v3 2 10 Morrison 2 moment scheme 13 SBU YLin 5 class scheme 14 Double moment 5 class scheme 16 Double moment 6 class scheme 17 NSSL 2 moment 18 NSSL 2 moment with CCN prediction 19 NSSL 1 moment 6 class 21 NSSL LFO 1 moment 6 class 28 aerosol aware Thompson scheme with water and ice friendly aerosol climatology new for V3 6 this option has 2 climatological aerosol input options use_aero_icbs F use constant values and use_aero_icbc T use input from WPS 30 HUJI Hebrew University of Jerusalem Israel spectral bin microphysics fast version 32 HUJI spectral bin microphysics full version 85 Etamp_hwrf scheme Similar to Ferrier modified for HWRF Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF 95 Ferrier coarse scheme Well tested for WRFE NMM used operationally at NCEP 98 Thompson v3 0 scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM do_radar_ref 0 allows radar reflectivity to be computed using mp scheme specific parameters Currently works formp physics 2 4 6 7 8 10 14 16 0 off 1 on ra_lw_physics 99 Long wave radiation opti
113. RF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 32 This command will create a directory called RIP RIP Directory Structure Under the main directory of RIP reside the following files and subdirectories e CHANGES a text file that logs changes to the RIP tar file e Doc a directory that contains documentation of RIP most notably the HTML version of the Users Guide that you are now reading ripug htm e Makefile the top level make file used to compile and link RIP e README a text file containing basic information on running RIP e color tbl a file that contains a table defining the colors you want to have available for RIP plots e eta_micro_lookup dat a file that contains look up table data for the Ferrier microphysics scheme e psadilookup dat a file that contains look up table data for obtaining temperature on a pseudoadiabat e sample_infiles a directory that contains sample user input files for RIP and related programs These files include bwave in grav2d_x in hill2d in qss in rip_sample in ripdp_wrfarw_sample in ripdp_wrfnmm_sample in sqx in sqy in tabdiag_sample in and tserstn dat e src a directory that contains all of the source code files for RIP RIPDP and several other utility programs Most of these are Fortran 77 source code files with extension f In addition there are o afew hand c files which are C source code files o comconst commptf comvctran and CMASSI comm which are include files that contain commo
114. The abbreviated names are used in the control file Note that the variable names also contain the type of level on which they are output For instance temperature is available on model surface and pressure surface The second line specifies the levels on which the variable is to be posted 0 indicates no output at this level and 1 indicates output the variable specified on the top line at the level specified by the position of the digit and the type of level defined for this variable For flight wind energy fields a 2 may be specified such that 2 requests AGL and 1 requests MSL Controlling which variables unipost outputs To output a field the body of the control file needs to contain an entry for the appropriate variable and output for this variable must be turned on for at least one level see Controlling which levels unipost outputs If an entry for a particular field is not yet WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 10 available in the control file two lines may be added to the control file with the appropriate entries for that field Controlling which levels unipost outputs The second line of each pair determines which levels unipost will output Output on a given level is turned off by a 0 or turned on by a 1 e For isobaric output 47 levels are possible from 2 to 1013 hPa 2 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 mb and then every 25 mb from 75 to 1000 mb The complete list of levels is specif
115. UI which interacts with the WPS and enables users to easily define domains create a namelist wps and run geogrid ungrib and metgrid A helpful online tutorial can be found at http wrfportal org DomainWizard html Writing Meteorological Data to the Intermediate Format The role of the ungrib program is to decode GRIB data sets into a simple intermediate format that is understood by metgrid If meteorological data are not available in GRIB Edition 1 or GRIB Edition 2 formats the user is responsible for writing such data into the intermediate file format Fortunately the intermediate format is relatively simple consisting of a sequence of unformatted Fortran writes It is important to note that these unformatted writes use big endian byte order which can typically be specified with compiler flags Below we describe the WPS intermediate format users interested in the SI or MMS intermediate formats can first gain familiarity with the WPS format which is very similar and later examine the Fortran subroutines that read and write all three intermediate formats metgrid src read_met_module F90 and metgrid src write_met_module F90 respectively When writing data to the WPS intermediate format 2 dimensional fields are written as a rectangular array of real values 3 dimensional arrays must be split across the vertical dimension into 2 dimensional arrays which are written independently It should also be noted that for global data sets either
116. WOUT SFCEVP Note For WRF NMM the period of accumulated precipitation is controlled by the namelist input variable tprec Hence this field in the wrfout file represents an accumulation over the time period tprec INT fhr 2 Aprec to fhr where fhr represents the forecast hour and 2 is a small number The GRIB file output by unipost and by copygb contains fields with the name of accumulation period Table 2 List of all possible fields read in by unipost for the WRF ARW T MUB SFROFF U P_TOP UDROFF V PHB SFCEVP QVAPOR PH SFCEXC QCLOUD SMOIS VEGFRA QICE TSLB ACSNOW QRAIN CLDFRA ACSNOM QSNOW U10 CANWAT QGRAUP V10 SST W TH2 THZO PB Q2 QZ0 P SMSTAV UZO MU SMSTOT VZO QSFC HGT ISLTYP ZO ALBEDO ISLOPE UST GSW XLAND AKHS GLW XLAT AKMS TMN XLONG TSK HEX MAPFAC_M RAINC LH STEPBL RAINNC GRDFLX HTOP RAINCV SNOW HBOT RAINNCV SNOWC Note For WRF ARW the accumulated precipitation fields RAINC and RAINNC are run total accumulations UPP Control File Overview Note The information within this section refers exclusively to outputting files in GRIB1 format Future releases of the UPP package will include the ability to output file in WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 9 GRIB2 format upon which updated overviews will be provided The user interacts with unipost through the control file parm wrf_cntrl parm The control file is composed of
117. WRF domain are not resolved in the GRIB data and especially if those lakes are geographically distant from resolved water bodies the SST field over lakes will most WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 19 likely be extrapolated from the nearest resolved water bodies in the GRIB data this situation can lead to lake SST values that are either unrealistically warm or unrealistically cold Without a higher resolution SST field for metgrid to use one alternative to extrapolating SST values for lakes is to manufacture a best guess at the SST for lakes In the metgrid and real programs this can be done using a combination of a special land use data set that distinguishes between lakes and oceans and a field to be used as a proxy for SST over lakes A special land use data set is necessary since WRF s real pre processing program needs to know where the manufactured SST field should be used instead of the interpolated SST field from the GRIB data The alternative procedure for initializing lake SSTs is summarized in the following steps 1 If they have not already been downloaded either as a separate tar file or as part of the full geographical data tar file obtain the special land use data sets that distinguish between lakes and oceans Two such data sets based on USGS and MODIS land use categories may be downloaded through the WRF download page For simplicity it is recommended to place the two directories in the same directory as
118. XYZ GREENFRAC units fraction GREENFRAC description Monthly green fraction GREENFRAC stagger M GREENFRAC sr x 1 GREENFRAC sr y 1 float SNOALB Time south_north west_east NOALB FieldType 104 LB MemoryOrder XY LB units percent OALB description Maximum snow albedo OALB stagger M NOALB sr x 1 NOALB sr_ y 1 float SLOPECAT Time south_north west _east SLOPECAT FieldType 104 SLOPECAT MemoryOrder XY SLOPECAT units category S S r NO NO N N PPP PS PY S S S S S S S 5al OPECAT description Dominant category OPECAT stagger M WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 56 SLOPECAT sr x 1 SLOPECAT sr y 1 global attributes TITLE OUTPUT FROM GEOGRID V3 4 SIMULATION START DATE 0000 00 00 00 00 00 WEST EAST GRID DIMENSION TO fe SOUTH NORTH GRID DIMENSION 39 BOTTOM TOP_ GRID _ ENSION 0 WEST EAST PATCH TART UNSTAG L k a W D I 5 EST EAST PATCH END_UNSTAG 19 TART STAG 1 ND_STAG 19 START _UNSTAG 1 END_UNSTAG 39 S Z 3 EST EAST_PATCH WEST EAST PATCH _ SOUTH NORTH_PATC SOUTH NORTH_PATC H H START STAG 1 _END_STAG 39 SOUTH NORTH_PATC SOUTH NORTH_PATC GRIDTYPE E DX 0 289143f DY
119. _x 1 SM000010 sr_y 1 PSFC Time PSFC FieldType PSFC MemoryOrder float 104 Ww XY Ww WRF NMM V3 User s Guide T 10 Soil Moist 100 200 cm below 40 cm below ground layer south _ north west_east r T 0 10 cm below ground layer south _ north west_east r gr south north west_east Soil Moist 40 100 cm below grn south north west_east r Soil Moist 10 40 cm below grn south _ north west_east r Soil Moist 0 10 cm below grn south _ north west east 3 60 PSEC PSEC PSFC PSEC PSFC float RH T J D DyN I float lt lt T gggggg33 float T C C C C float TT T units Pa description Surface Pressure stagger M sr x 1 SPAY LF ime num_metgrid levels south_north H FieldType 104 H MemoryOrder XYZ H units S description Relative Humidity H stagger M H sr x 1 H sr y 1 ime num _metgrid levels south_north FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XYZ zunits m s 1 description V stagger V Tsp ok SL y pSr y iS lv ime num _metgrid levels south north FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XYZ units m s 1 UU description U UU stagger V UU sr x 1 UU sr y 1 ime num_metgrid levels south_north TT FieldType 104 TT MemoryOrder XYZ TT units K
120. a Gaussian or cylindrical equidistant projection must be used and for regional data sets either a Mercator Lambert conformal polar stereographic or cylindrical equidistant may be used The sequence of writes used to write a single 2 dimensional array in the WPS intermediate format is as follows note that not all of the variables declared below are used for a given projection of the data integer version Format version must 5 for WPS format integer nx ny x and y dimensions of 2 d array integer sy iproj Code for projection of data in array 1 1 0 1 1 1 cylindrical equidistant 1 Mercator 3 Lambert conformal conic 4 Gaussian global only WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 26 5 Polar stereographic 1 real nlats Number of latitudes north of equator for Gaussian grids real xfcst Forecast hour of data real xlvl Vertical level of data in 2 d array real startlat startlon Lat lon of point in array indicated by startloc string real deltalat deltalon Grid spacing degrees real dx dy Grid spacing km real xlonc Standard longitude of projection real truelatl truelat2 True latitudes of projection real earth radius Earth radius km real dimension nx ny slab The 2 d array holding the data logical is wind grid _rel Flag indicating whether winds are relative to source grid TRUE or
121. a header and a body The header specifies the output file information The body allows the user to select which fields and levels to process The header of the wrf_cntrl parm file contains the following variables e KGTYPE defines output grid type which should always be 255 e IMDLTY identifies the process ID for AWIPS e DATSET defines the prefix used for the output file name Currently set to WRFPRS Note the run_ scripts assume WRFPRS is used The body of the wrf_cntrl parm file is composed of a series of line pairs similar to the following PRESS ON MDL SFCS_ SCAL 3 0 L 11000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 where The top line specifies the variable e g PRESS to process the level type e g ON MDL SFCS a user is interested in and the degree of accuracy to be retained SCAL 3 0 in the GRIB output o SCAL defines the precision of the data written out to the GRIB format Positive values denote decimal scaling maintain that number of significant digits while negative values describe binary scaling precise to 2 SCAL i e SCAL 3 0 gives output precise to the nearest 1 8 Because copygb is unable to handle binary precision at this time negative numbers are discouraged o A list of all possible output fields for unipost is provided in Table 3 This table provides the full name of the variable in the first column and an abbreviated name in the second column
122. a line or entry in the Vtable depends on the specifics of the field and level The first group of fields those that describe how the data are identified within the GRIB file are given under the column headings of the Vtable shown below GRIB1 Level From To Param Typ Levell Level2 The GRIB1 Param field specifies the GRIB code for the meteorological field which is a number unique to that field within the data set However different data sets may use different GRIB codes for the same field for example temperature at upper air levels has GRIB code 11 in GFS data but GRIB code 130 in ECMWF data To find the GRIB code for a field the glprint exe and g2print exe utility program may be used Given a GRIB code the Level Type From Levell and From Level2 fields are used to specify which levels a field may be found at As with the GRIB 1 Param field the gl print exe and g2print exe programs may be used to find values for the level fields The meanings of the level fields are dependent on the Level Type field and are summarized in the following table WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 28 Level Level Type From Levell To Level2 Upper air 100 blank Surface 1 0 blank Sea level 102 0 blank Levels at a specified 105 Height in meters of blank height AGL the level above ground Fields given as layers 112 Starting level for the Ending level for
123. able files for many sources of meteorological data and the appropriate Vtable may simply be symbolically linked to the file Vtable which is the Vtable name expected by ungrib For example if the GRIB data are from the GFS model this could be accomplished with gt ln s ungrib Variable Tables Vtable GFS Vtable The ungrib program will try to read GRIB files named GRIBFILE AAA GRIBFILE AAB GRIBFILE ZZZ In order to simplify the work of linking the GRIB files to these filenames a shell script link_grib csh is provided The link_grib csh script takes as a command line argument a list of the GRIB files to be linked For example if the GRIB data were downloaded to the directory data gfs the files could be linked with link_grib csh as follows gt ls data gfs rw r r 1 42728372 gfs 080324 12 00 rw r r 1 48218303 gfs_080324 12 06 gt link_grib csh data gfs gfs After linking the GRIB files and Vtable a listing of the WPS directory should look something like the following WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 8 gt 1s drwxr xr x 2 4096 arch rwxr xr x 1 1672 clean rwxr xr x 1 3510 compile rw r r 1 85973 compile output rwxr xr x 1 4257 configure Sfwarsera 1 2486 configure wps rw r r 1 1957004 geo_nmm d01 nc rw r r 1 4745324 geo_nmm d02 nc drwxr xr x 4 4096 geogrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 geogrid exe gt geogrid src geogrid exe rw r r 1 11169 geogrid log
124. al from the parent hybrid surfaces onto the nest hybrid surfaces using cubic splines The boundary conditions for the nest are updated at every time step of the parent domain The outermost rows columns of the nest are forced to be identical to the parent domain interpolated to the nest grid points The third rows columns are not directly altered by the parent domain that is their values are obtained from internal computations within the nest The second rows columns are a blend of the first and third rows columns This procedure is analogous to what is used to update the boundaries of the coarsest domain with the external data source To obtain the values of the mass and momentum fields in the outermost row column of the nest interpolations from the parent grid to the nest are carried in the same manner as for nest initialization Most of options to start a nest run are handled through the namelist Note All variables in the namelist input file that have multiple columns of entries need to be edited with caution The following are the key namelist variables to modify e start_ and end_year month day minute second These control the nest start and end times e history_interval History output file in minutes integer only e frames_per_outfile Number of output times per history output file used to split output files into smaller pieces e max_dom Setting this to a number greater than 1 will invoke nesting For example if you want to have
125. angular grid spacing to obtain an integer number of time steps per hour For example If the grid spacing of the coarsest grid is 12km then this gives dt 27 s with a dt 26 2 3 s corresponding to 135 time steps per hour The following are pre tested time steps for WRF NMM Approximate Grid DELTA_X DELTA_Y Time Step Spacing km in degrees in degrees seconds 4 0 026726057 0 026315789 9 10s 8 0 053452115 0 052631578 18s 10 0 066666666 0 065789474 24s 12 0 087603306 0 075046904 25 30s 22 0 154069767 0 140845070 60s 32 0 222222222 0 205128205 90s e_we and e_sn Given WRF NMM s E grid staggering the end index in the east west direction e_we and the south north direction e_sn for the coarsest grid need to be set with care and the e_sn value must be EVEN for WRF NMM When using WPS the coarsest grid dimensions should be set as e_we namelist input e_ew namelist wps e_sn namelist input e_sn namelist wps For example The parent grid e_we and e_sn are set up as follows namelist input namelist wps e_we 124 e_we 124 e_sn 202 e_sn 202 Other than what was stated above there are no additional rules to follow when choosing e_we and e_sn for nested grids WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 23 dx and dy For WRF NMM dx and dy are the horizontal grid spacing in degrees rather than meters unit used for WRF ARW Note that dx should be slightly larger than dy due to the
126. at RLWTOA Time south_north west_east float ALWIN Time south_north west_east float ALWOUT Time south_north west_east float ALWTOA Time south_north west_east float RSWIN Time south_north west_east float RSWINC Time south_north west_east float RSWOUT Time south_north west_east float ASWIN Time south_north west_east float ASWOUT Time south_north west_east float ASWTOA Time south_north west_east float SECSHX Time south_north west_east float SFCLHX Time south_north west_east float SUBSHX Time south_north west_east float SNOPCX Time south_north west_east float SFCUVX Time south_north west_east float POTEVP Time south_north west_east float POTFLX Time south_north west_east float TLMIN Time south_north west_east float TLMAX Time south_north west_east float TO2_MIN Time south_north west_east float TO2_MAX Time south_north west_east float RHO2_MIN Time south_north west_east float RHO2_MAX Time south_north west_east int NCFRCV Time south_north west_east int NCFRST Time south_north west_east int NPHSO Time int NPREC Time int NCLOD Time int NHEAT Time int NRDLW Time int NRDSW Time int NSRFC Time float AVRAIN Time float AVCNVC Time float ACUTIM Time WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 52 float ARDLW Time float ARDSW Time float ASRFC Time float APHTIM Time float LANDMASK Time
127. ates that there is no separate lake category 3 After running the ungrib program use the avg_tsfc exe utility program to create an intermediate file containing a daily average surface air temperature field which will WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 20 be substituted for the SST field only over lakes by the real program for more information on the avg_tsfc exe utility see the section on WPS utility programs 4 Before running the metgrid program add the TAVGSFC file created in the previous step to the specification of constants name in the amp metgrid record of the namelist wps file 5 Run WRPF s real exe program as usual after setting the number of land categories num_land_cat in the amp physics record of the namelist input file so that it matches the value of the global attribute NUM_LAND_CAT in the metgrid files If the global attribute ISLAKE in the metgrid files indicates that there is a special land use category for lakes the real program will substitute the TAVGSFC field for the SST field only over those grid points whose category matches the lake category additionally the real program will change the land use category of lakes back to the general water category the category used for oceans since neither the LANDUSE TBL nor the VEGPARM TBL files contain an entry for a lake category Parallelism in the WPS If the dimensions of the domains to be processed by the WPS become too large to fit in the memory of a single CPU it
128. ation and analysis of tornado development and decay within a three dimensional supercell thunderstorm J Atmos Sci 52 2675 2703 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 58 User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 6 WRF Software Table of Contents WRE Build Mechanism Registry I O Applications Program Interface I O API Timekeeping Software Documentation Performance WRE Build Mechanism The WRF build mechanism provides a uniform apparatus for configuring and compiling the WRF model and pre processors over a range of platforms with a variety of options This section describes the components and functioning of the build mechanism For information on building the WRF code see Chapter 2 Required software The WRF build relies on Perl version 5 or later and a number of UNIX utilities csh and Bourne shell make M4 sed awk and the uname command A C compiler is needed to compile programs and libraries in the tools and external directories The WRF code itself is mostly standard Fortran and uses a few 2003 capabilities For distributed memory processing MPI and related tools and libraries should be installed Build Mechanism Components Directory structure The directory structure of WRF consists of the top level directory plus directories containing files related to the WRF software framework frame the WRF model dyn_em dyn_nmm phys share co
129. ay is required a separates those sections from each other in the lt Variables gt column In addition to handling 4 D arrays and their underlying component 3 D arrays the package entry is able to associate generic state variables as shown in the example following If the namelist variable use_wps_input is set to 1 then the variables u_ge and y_gc are available to be processed lt Table gt lt PackageName gt lt NMLAssociated gt lt Variables gt package realonly use_wps_input 1 state u_gc v_gc WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 13 T O Applications Program Interface I O API The software that implements WRF I O like the software that implements the model in general is organized hierarchically as a software stack http www mmm ucar edu wrf WG2 Tigers IOAPINOStack html From top closest to the model code itself to bottom closest to the external package implementing the I O the I O stack looks like this Domain I O operations on an entire domain Field I O operations on individual fields Package neutral I O API Package dependent I O API external package There is additional information on the WRF I O software architecture at hitp www mmm ucar edu wrf WG2 IOAPINO_files v3_document htm The lower levels of the stack are described in the I O and Model Coupling API specification document at http www mmm ucar edu wrf WG2 Tigers IOAP I index html Timekeeping Starting times stopping times and tim
130. ber of domains nests including the parent domain in the simulation Default value is 1 3 START_YEAR A list of MAX_DOM 4 digit integers specifying the starting UTC year of the simulation for each nest No default value 4 START_MONTH A list of MAX_DOM 2 digit integers specifying the starting UTC month of the simulation for each nest No default value 5 START_DAY A list of MAX_DOM 2 digit integers specifying the starting UTC day of the simulation for each nest No default value 6 START_HOUR A list of MAX_DOM 2 digit integers specifying the starting UTC hour of the simulation for each nest No default value 7 END_YEAR A list of MAX_DOM 4 digit integers specifying the ending UTC year of the simulation for each nest No default value 8 END_MONTH A list of MAX_DOM 2 digit integers specifying the ending UTC month of the simulation for each nest No default value 9 END_DAY A list of MAX_DOM 2 digit integers specifying the ending UTC day of the simulation for each nest No default value 10 END_HOUR A list of MAX_DOM 2 digit integers specifying the ending UTC hour of the simulation for each nest No default value 11 START_DATE A list of MAX_DOM character strings of the form yyyy mm DD_HH mm ss specifying the starting UTC date of the simulation for each nest The start date variable is an alternate to specifying start_year start _month start day and start_hour and if both methods are used for specifying t
131. binary file as before beginning with the smallest r index Categorical fields that are given as fractional fields for each possible category can be thought of as multi level continuous fields where each level k 1 lt k lt r is the fractional field for category k When writing a field to a file in the geogrid binary format the user should adhere to the naming convention used by the geogrid program which expects data files to have names of the form xstart xend ystart yend where xstart xend ystart and yend are five digit positive integers specifying respectively the starting x index of the array contained in the file the ending x index of the array the starting y index of the array and the ending y index of the array here indexing begins at 1 rather than 0 So for example an 800 x 1200 array i e 800 rows and 1200 columns might be named 00001 01200 00001 00800 When a data set is given in several pieces each of the pieces may be formed as a regular rectangular array and each array may be written to a separate file In this case the relative locations of the arrays are determined by the range of x and y indices in the file names for each of the arrays It is important to note however that every tile in a data set must have the same x and y dimensions and that tiles of data within a data set must not overlap furthermore all tiles must start and end on multiples of the index ranges For example the global 30 second USGS to
132. bol lt or gt and maskval is a real value Default value is no mask 13 FILL_MISSING A real number specifying the value to be assigned to model grid points that received no interpolated value for example because of missing or incomplete meteorological data Default value is 1 E20 14 Z_DIM_NAME For 3 dimensional meteorological fields a character string giving the name of the vertical dimension to be used for the field on output Default value is num_metgrid_levels WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 46 15 DERIVED Either yes or no indicating whether the field is to be derived from other interpolated fields rather than interpolated from an input field Default value is no 16 FILL_LEV The 111 _1lev keyword which may be specified multiple times within a table section specifies how a level of the field should be filled if that level does not already exist A generic value for the keyword takes the form DLEVEL FIELD SLEVEL where DLEVEL specifies the level in the field to be filled FIELD specifies the source field from which to copy levels and SLEVEL specifies the level within the source field to use DLEVEL may either be an integer or the string a11 FIELD may either be the name of another field the string const or the string vertical_index If FIELD is specified as const then SLEVEL is a constant value that will be used to fill with if FIELD is specified as vertical index then SLEVEL must not be specified and the va
133. can be found on the MET User s site at http Avww dtcenter org met users WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 1 3 WRF NMM FLOW CHART Terrestrial Data geo_nmm_ nest WPS met_nmm d0ol real_nmm exe Real data initialization Model Data NAM Fta GFS NNRP wrfinput_d0l wrfbdy_d01 WRF NMM Core wrfout_dol wrfout_d02 Output in netCDF UPP GrADS GEMPAK MET Figure 1 WRF NMM flow chart for Version 3 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 1 4 User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 2 Software Installation Table of Contents e Introduction e Required Compilers and Scripting Languauges o WRE System Software Requirements o WPS Software Requirements e Required Optional Libraries to Download e UNIX Environment Settings e Building the WRF System for the NMM Core o Obtaining and Opening the WRF Package o How to Configure WRF o How to Compile WRF for the NMM Core e Building the WRF Preprocessing System o How to Install the WPS Introduction The WRF modeling system software installation is fairly straightforward on the ported platforms listed below The model component portion of the package is mostly self contained The WRF model does contain the source code to a Fortran interface to ESMF and the source to FFTPACK Contained within the WRF system is the WRFDA component which has several external libraries that
134. ch time the user can iteratively adjust the locations of nests by editing the namelist wps file running plotgrids exe and determining a set of adjustments to the nest locations Currently this utility does not work for ARW domains that use the latitude longitude projection i e when map proj lat lon E glprint exe The glprint exe program takes as its only command line argument the name of a GRIB Edition 1 file The program prints a listing of the fields levels and dates of the data in the file F g2print exe Similar to glprint exe the g2print exe program takes as its only command line argument the name of a GRIB Edition 2 file The program prints a listing of the fields levels and dates of the data in the file G plotfmt exe WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 25 The plotfmt exe is an NCAR Graphics program that plots the contents of an intermediate format file The program takes as its only command line argument the name of the file to plot and produces an NCAR Graphics metafile which contains contour plots of each field in input file The graphics metafile output gmeta may be viewed with the idt command or converted to another format using utilities such as ctrans H rd_intermediate exe Given the name of a singe intermediate format file on the command line the rd_intermediate exe program prints information about the fields contained in the file WRF Domain Wizard WRE Domain Wizard is a graphical user interface G
135. ciated with a physics package or needs to provide a tendency to multiple physics or dynamics routines is contained in the Registry For each of these variables the index ordering horizontal and vertical staggering feedback and nesting interpolation requirements and the associated IO are defined For most users to add a variable into the model requires regardless of dimensionality only the addition of a single line to the Registry make sure that changes are made to the correct Registry core file as changes to the Registry file itself are overwritten Since the Registry modifies code for compile time options any change to the Registry REQUIRES that the code be returned to the original unbuilt status with the clean a command The other very typical activity for users is to define new run time options which are handled via a Fortran namelist file namelist input in WRF As with the model state arrays and variables the entire model configuration is described in the Registry As with WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 6 the model arrays adding a new namelist entry is as easy as adding a new line in the Registry While the model state and configuration are by far the most commonly used features in the Registry the data dictionary has several other powerful uses The Registry file provides input to generate all of the communications for the distributed memory processing halo interchanges between patches support for periodic lateral boundarie
136. convergence of meridians approaching the poles on the rotated grid The grid spacing in namelist input should have the same values as in namelist wps When using WPS dx namelist input dx namelist wps dy namelist input dy namelist wps When running a simulation with multiple N nests the namelist should have N values of dx dy e_we e_sn separated by commas For more information about the horizontal grid spacing for WRF NMM please see Chapter 3 WRF Preprocessing System WPS nio_tasks_per_group The number of T O tasks nio_tasks_per_group should evenly divide into the number of compute tasks in the J direction on the grid that is the value of nproc_y For example if there are 6 compute tasks in the J direction then nio_tasks_per_group could legitimately be set to 1 2 3 or 6 The user needs to use a number large enough that the quilting for a given output time is finished before the next output time is reached If one had 6 compute tasks in the J direction and the number in the I direction was similar then one would probably choose either 1 or 2 quilt tasks The following table provides an overview of the parameters specified in namelist input Note that namelist input is common for both WRF cores WRF ARW and WRF NMM Most of the parameters are valid for both cores However some parameters are only valid for one of the cores Core specific parameters are noted in the table In addition some physics opti
137. cript configures the model for compilation on your system The configuration first attempts to locate needed libraries such as NetCDF or HDF and tools such as Perl It will check for these in normal places or will use settings from the user s shell environment The configuration file then calls the UNIX uname command to discover what platform you are compiling on It then calls the Perl script arch Config_new pl which traverses the list of known machine configurations and displays a list of available options to the user The selected set of options is then used to create the configure wrf file in the top level directory This file may be edited but changes are temporary since the file will be deleted by clean a or overwritten by the next invocation of the configure script The only typical option that is included on the configure command is d for debug The code builds relatively quickly and has the debugging switches enabled but the model will run very slowly since all of the optimization has been deactivated This script takes only a few seconds to run Compilation The compile script is used to compile the WRF code after it has been configured using the configure script This csh script performs a number of checks constructs an argument list copies to Registry Registry the correct Registry core file for the core being compiled and invokes the UNIX make command in the top level directory The core to be compiled is determined from the us
138. d copygb on a single wrfout file containing multiple forecast times run_unipost _gracet run unipost ndate and copygb on wrfout files with non zero minutes seconds run_unipost _minute run unipost ndate and copygb for sub hourly wrfout files WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 3 include Source include modules built used during compilation of UPP lib Archived libraries built used by UPP parm Contains the parameter files which can be modified by the user to control how the post processing is performed src Contains source codes for copygb Source code for copygb ndate Source code for ndate unipost Source code for unipost lib Contains source code subdirectories for the UPP libraries bacio Binary I O library crtm2 Community Radiative Transfer Model library g2 GRIB2 support library g2tmpl GRIB2 table support library gfsio GFS I O routines ip General interpolation library see lib ip iplib doc nemsio NEMS I O routines sfcio API for performing I O on the surface restart file of the global spectral model sigio API for performing I O on the sigma restart file of the global spectral model sp Spectral transform library see lib sp splib doc w3emce Library for coding and decoding data in GRIB1 format w3nco Library for coding and decoding data in GRIB1 format wrfmpi_stubs Contains some C and FORTRAN codes to genereate libmpi a library used to replace MPI calls for serial compilation xml XML support GRIB2 parameter file
139. d interpolation controlled by d and the feedback controlled by u use default routines Variables that are land fields such as soil temperature TSLB or water fields such as sea ice XICE have special interpolators as shown in the examples below again interleaved for readability lt Table gt lt Type gt lt Sym gt lt Dims gt state real TSLB ilj state real XICE ij lt Use gt lt NumTLev gt lt Stagger gt misc 1 Z misc 1 lt IO gt i02rhd interp_mask_land_field lu_index u copy_fcnm 10124rhd interp_mask_water_field lu_index u copy_fcnm lt DNAME gt lt DESCRIP gt lt UNITS gt TSLB SOIL TEMPERATURE K SEAICE SEA ICE FLAG cies Note that the d and u entries in the lt IO gt section are followed by an then a parenthesis enclosed subroutine and a colon separated list of additional variables to pass to the routine It is recommended that users follow the existing pattern du for non masked variables and the above syntax for the existing interpolators for masked variables Registry Rconfig The Registry file is the location where the run time options to configure the model are defined Every variable in the WRF namelist is described by an entry in the Registry file The default value for each of the namelist variables is as assigned in the Registry The standard form for the entry for two namelist variables is given broken across lines and interleaved WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 10
140. d m for NMM this must be one of HH and vv Default value for ARW is m default value for NMM is Hu 7 IS_U_FIELD Either yes or no indicating whether the field is to be used as the wind U component field For ARW the wind U component field must be interpolated to the U staggering output_stagger U for NMM the wind U component field must be interpolated to the V staggering output_stagger vv Default value is no WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 45 8 IS_V_FIELD Either yes or no indicating whether the field is to be used as the wind V component field For ARW the wind V component field must be interpolated to the V staggering output_stagger Vv for NMM the wind V component field must be interpolated to the V staggering output_stagger vv Default value is no 9 INTERP_OPTION A sequence of one or more names of interpolation methods to be used when horizontally interpolating the field Available interpolation methods are average 4pt average lopt wt_average 4pt wt_average_l6pt nearest neighbor four pt sixteen pt search average _gcell r for the grid cell average method average_gce11 the optional argument r specifies the minimum ratio of source data resolution to simulation grid resolution at which the method will be applied if a ratio is not specified r 0 0 and the option is used for any ratio When a sequence of two or more methods are given the methods should be separated by a sign Default value is nearest neighb
141. d to indicate that the PSL will continue onto the next line You may continue to the next line as many times as you want for a PSL but the total length of the PSL cannot exceed 240 characters Any line in the PST can be commented out simply by putting a pound sign anywhere in the line at the beginning makes the most sense Note that the pound sign only comments out the line which is not necessarily the same as the PSL If the PSL is continued onto another line both lines must be commented out in order to comment out the entire PSL A partial PSL will likely cause a painful error in RIP If all the PSLs ina FSG are commented out then the line of equal signs at the end of the FSG should also be commented out There is a special keyword incl which allows the user to tell RIP to insert at run time additional information from another file into the plot specification table This capability makes it easier to repeat large sections of plot specification information in a single input file or to maintain a library of canned plot specifications that can be easily included in different input files The incl keyword is described in more detail in Appendix A in the full RIP User s Guide WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 41 Each keyword has a variable associated with it in the program and this variable may be of type integer real character logical or array The keywords that are associated with a real variable expect values that are of Fortran
142. del solver In this example for readability the column titles and the entries are broken into multiple interleaved lines with the user entries in a bold font Some fields have simple entries in the Registry file The following is a state variable that is a Fortran type real The name of the field inside the WRF model is u_ge It is a three dimension array igj It has a single time level and is staggered in the X and Z WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 8 directions This field is input only to the real program iJ On output the netCDF name is UU with the accompanying description and units provided lt Table gt lt Type gt lt Sym gt lt Dims gt state real u_gc ijg lt Use gt lt NumTLev gt lt Stagger gt lt IO gt dyn_nmm 1 Z il lt DNAME gt lt DESCRIP gt lt UNITS gt UU x wind component m s 1 If a variable is not staggered a dash is inserted instead of leaving a blank space The same dash character is required to fill in a location when a field has no IO specification The variable description and units columns are used for post processing purposes only this information is not directly utilized by the model When adding new variables to the Registry file users are warned to make sure that variable names are unique The lt Sym gt refers to the variable name inside the WRF model and it is not case sensitive The lt DNAMES gt is quoted and appears exactly as typed Do not use imbedded spaces Whi
143. diag is run as follows tabdiag diagnostic output file tabdiag input file WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 46 The result will be a text file with a table for each trajectory showing the time evolution of the diagnostic quantities Some adjustment of the column headings and format statement will probably be necessary to make it look just right Creating Vis5D Dataset with RIP VisSD is a powerful visualization software package developed at the University of Wisconsin and is widely used by mesoscale modelers to perform interactive 3D visualization of model output Although it does not have the flexibility of RIP for producing a wide range of 2D plot types with extensive user control over plot details its 3D visualization capability and fast interactive response make it an attractive complement to RIP A key difference between RIP and VisSD is that RIP was originally developed specifically for scientific diagnosis and operational display of mesoscale modeling system output This has two important implications 1 The RIP system can ingest model output files and 2 RIP can produce a wide array of diagnostic quantities that mesoscale modelers want to see Thus it makes sense to make use of these qualities to have RIP act as a bridge between a mesoscale model and the Vis5D package For this reason a Vis5D format data generating capability was added to RIP With this capability you can create a VisSD data set from your model data set including a
144. ding the colon preceding the date When more than one fg_name is specified and the same field is found in two or more input sources the data in the last encountered source will take priority over all preceding sources for that field Default value is an empty list 1 e no meteorological fields 2 CONSTANTS_NAME A list of character strings specifying the path and full filename of ungribbed data files which are time invariant The path may be relative or absolute and the filename should be the complete filename since the data are assumed to be time invariant no date will be appended to the specified filename Default value is an empty list i e no constant fields WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 38 3 IO_FORM_METGRID The WRF I O API format that the output created by the metgrid program will be written in Possible options are 1 for binary 2 for NetCDF 3 for GRIB1 When option 1 is given output files will have a suffix of int when option 2 is given output files will have a suffix of nc when option 3 is given output files will have a suffix of gr1 Default value is 2 NetCDF 4 OPT_OUTPUT_FROM_METGRID_PATH A character string giving the path either relative or absolute to the location where output files from metgrid should be written to The default value is the current working directory 1 e the default value is 5 OPT_METGRID_TBL_PATH A character string giving the path either relative or absolute to the METGRI
145. dnn 6 Create namelist itag that will be read in by unipost exe from stdin unit 5 This namelist contains 5 lines i Name of the WRF output file to be posted ii Format of WRF model output netcdf binary or binarympiio iii Format of UPP output grib1 or grib2 iv Forecast valid time not model start time in WRF format the forecast time desired to be post processed v Dynamic core used NMM or NCAR Note With the addition of GRIB2 output capabilities a fifth line has been added to the namelist If the third line i e UPP output type is not set UPP will default the output file format to grib1 7 Run unipost and check for errors The execution command in the distributed scripts is for a single processor unipost exe gt outpost 2 gt amp 1 e Torun unipost using mpi dmpar compilation the command line should be O LINUX MPI systems mpirun np N unipost exe gt outpost 2 gt amp 1 Note on some systems a host file also needs to be specified machinefile host WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 13 O IBM mpirun lsf unipost exe lt itag gt outpost 8 Setup grid to post to see full description under Run copygb below copygb is run with a pre defined AWIPS grid gridno standard AWIPS grid to interpolate WRF model output to copygb ingests a kgds definition on the command line copygb ingests the contents of file copygb_gridnav txt or copygb_hwrf txt through variable nav 9 Run copygb
146. dom This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of hours of accumulation of gridscale and convective heating rates in WRF output tclod max_dom This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of hours of accumulation of cloud amounts in WRF output trdsw max_dom This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of hours of accumulation of shortwave fluxes in WRF output trdlw max_dom This flag is only for the WRF NMM core WRF NMM V3 User s Guide Variable Names Value Example Description Number of hours of accumulation of longwave fluxes in WRF output tsrfc max_dom This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of hours of accumulation of evaporation sfc fluxes in WRF output pcpflg max_dom false This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Logical switch that turns on off the precipitation assimilation used operationally at NCEP co2tf This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Controls CO2 input used by the GFDL radiation scheme 0 Read CO2 functions data from pre generated file 1 Generate CO2 functions data internally sf_sfclay_physics max_dom Surface layer options 0 No surface layer scheme 1 Monin Obukhov scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 2 Janjic scheme Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 3 NCEP Global Forecast System scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 4 QNSE 5 MYNN 7 Pleim Xiu
147. domain files If not the geogrid log file may be consulted in an attempt to determine the possible cause of failure For more information on checking the output of geogrid the user is referred to the section on checking WPS output gt 1s drwxr xr x 2 4096 arch rwxr xr x 1 1672 clean rwxr xr x 1 3510 compile rw r r 1 85973 compile output rwxr xr x 1 4257 configure rw r r 1 2486 configure wps rw r r 1 1957004 geo nmm dO0Ol nc rw r r 1 4745324 geo _nmm d02 nc drwxr xr x 4 4096 geogrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 geogrid exe gt geogrid src geogrid exe rw r r 1 11169 geogrid log rwxr xr x 1 1328 link grib csh drwxr xr x 3 4096 metgrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 metgrid exe gt metgrid src metgrid exe rw r r 1 1094 namelist wps rw r r 1 1987 namelist wps all_ options rw r r 1 1075 namelist wps global fw r r 1 652 namelist wps nmm rw r r 1 4786 README drwxr xr x 4 4096 ungrib lrwxrwxrwx 1 21 ungrib exe gt ungrib src ungrib exe drwxr xr x 3 4096 util Step 2 Extracting meteorological fields from GRIB files with ungrib Having already downloaded meteorological data in GRIB format the first step in extracting fields to the intermediate format involves editing the share and ungrib namelist records of the namelist wps file the same file that was edited to define the simulation domains An example of the two namelist records is given below WRF NMM V3 Us
148. e UPP software package is based on WPP but has enhanced capabilities to post process output from a variety of NWP models including WRF NMM WRF ARW Non hydrostatic Multi scale Model on the B grid NMMB Global Forecast System GFS and Climate Forecast System CFS At this time community user support is provided for the WRF based systems only UPP interpolates output from the model s native grids to National Weather Service NWS standard levels pressure height etc and standard output grids AWIPS Lambert Conformal polar stereographic etc in NWS and World Meteorological Organization WMO GRIB format There is also an option to output fields on the model s native vertical levels With the release of UPPv2 0 preliminary code has been introduced to output in GRIB Edition 2 GRIB2 format While capabilities for outputting in GRIB2 format exist within the code these capabilities are not yet fully functional Introductory information regarding this new output format is provided due to the influence the additions have had on the UPP package upon full implementation of GRIB2 output capabilities more comprehensive information will be provided In addition UPP incorporates the Joint Center for Satellite Data Assimilation JCSDA Community Radiative Transfer Model CRTM to compute model derived brightness temperature Tg for various instruments and channels This additional feature enables the generation of simulated GOES and AMSRE product
149. e intervals in WRF are stored and manipulated as Earth System Modeling Framework ESMF http www cisl ucar edu research 2005 esmf jsp time manager objects This allows exact representation of time instants and intervals as integer numbers of years months hours days minutes seconds and fractions of a second numerator and denominator are specified separately as integers All time computations involving these objects are performed exactly by using integer arithmetic with the result that there is no accumulated time step drift or rounding even for fractions of a second The WRF implementation of the ESMF Time Manger is distributed with WRF in the external esmf_time_f90 directory This implementation is entirely Fortran90 as opposed to the ESMF implementation in C and it is conformant to the version of the ESMF Time Manager API that was available in 2009 WRE source modules and subroutines that use the ESMF routines do so by use association of the top level ESMF Time Manager module esmf_mod USE esmf_mod The code is linked to the library file libesmf_time a in the external esmf_time_f90 directory ESMF timekeeping is set up on a domain by domain basis in the routine setup_timekeeping share set_timekeeping F Each domain keeps its own clocks and WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 14 alarms Since the time arithmetic is exact there is no problem with clocks on separate domains getting out of synchronization Software Documentation
150. e masked keyword is used for a field those grid points that are of the masked type land or water will be assigned the value specified by fill_missing Default value is null 1 e the field is not masked 13 FILL_MISSING A real value used to fill in any missing or masked grid points in the interpolated field Default value is 1 E20 14 HALT_ON_MISSING Either yes or no indicating whether geogrid should halt with a fatal message when a missing value is encountered in the interpolated field Default value is no 15 DOMINANT_CATEGORY When specified as a character string the effect is to cause geogrid to compute the dominant category from the fractional categorical field and to output the dominant category field with the name specified by the value of dominant category This option can only be used for fields with dest_type categorical Default value is null i e no dominant category will be computed from the fractional categorical field 16 DOMINANT_ONLY When specified as a character string the effect is similar to that of the dominant category keyword geogrid will compute the dominant category from the fractional categorical field and output the dominant category field with the name specified by the value of dominant_only Unlike with dominant category though when dominant_only is used the fractional categorical field will not appear in the geogrid output This option can only be used for fields with dest_type categorical
151. e model can be found in Chapter 5 WRF NMM input data must be created using the WPS code see Chapter 3 Building the WRF Preprocessing System WPS How to Install the WPS The WRF Preprocessing System uses a build mechanism similar to that used by the WRF model External libraries for geogrid and metgrid are limited to those required by the WRF model since the WPS uses the WRF model s implementations of the I O API consequently WRF must be compiled prior to installation of the WPS so that the I O API libraries in the external directory of WRF will be available to WPS programs Additionally the ungrib program requires three compression libraries for GRIB Edition 2 support described in the Required Optional Libraries above However if support for GRIB2 data is not needed ungrib can be compiled without these compression libraries Once the WPS tar file has been obtained unpack it at the same directory level as WRFV3 tar zxvf WPS tar gz At this point a listing of the current working directory should at least include the directories WRF V3 and WPS First compile WRF see the instructions for installing WRP Then after the WRF executables are generated change to the WPS directory and issue the configure command followed by the compile command as shown below cd WPS configure Choose one of the configure options listed compile gt amp compile_wps output After issuing the compile command a listing of the curren
152. e re set before metgrid is run Given intermediate files for all three parts of the NARR data set metgrid exe may be run after the constants name and fg_name variables in the smetgrid namelist record are set metgrid constants name NARR_FIXED fg_name NARR_3D NARR_SFC Although less common another situation where multiple data sources would be required is when a source of meteorological data from a regional model is insufficient to cover the entire simulation domain and data from a larger regional model or a global model must be used when interpolating to the remaining points of the simulation grid For example to use NAM data wherever possible and GFS data elsewhere the following values might be assigned in the namelist metgrid fg_name data ungribbed GFS data ungribbed NAM Then the resulting model domain would use data as shown in the figure below GFS If no field is found in more than one source then no prioritization need be applied by metgrid and each field will simply be interpolated as usual of course each source should cover the entire simulation domain to avoid areas of missing data Alternative Initialization of Lake SSTs The default treatment of sea surface temperatures both for oceans and lakes in the metgrid program involves simply interpolating the SST field from the intermediate files to all water points in the WRF domain However if the lakes that are resolved in the
153. e that the three primary dimensions are named as west_east south_north and bottom_top That information is contained in this example the example is broken across two lines but interleaved lt Table gt lt Dim gt lt Order gt lt How defined gt dimspec i 1 standard domain dimspec j 3 standard domain dimspec k 2 standard_domain lt Coord axis gt lt Dimname in Datasets gt x west_east y south_north Z bottom_top The WRF system has a notion of horizontal and vertical staggering so the dimension names are extended with a _stag suffix for the staggered sizes The list of names in the lt Dim gt column may either be a single unique character for release 3 0 1 1 and prior or the lt Dim gt column may be a string with no embedded spaces such as my_dim When this dimension is used later to dimension a state or i1 variable it must be surrounded by curly braces such as my_dim This lt Dim gt variable is not case specific so for example i is the same as an entry for T Registry State and I1 A state variable in WRF is a field that is eligible for IO and communications and exists for the duration of the model forecast The JI variables intermediate level one are typically thought of as tendency terms computed during a single model time step and then discarded prior to the next time step The space allocation and de allocation for these JI variables is automatic on the stack for the mo
154. each of the available interpolation options in the WPS are described conceptually for the details of each method the user is referred to the source code in the file WPS geogrid src interp_options F 1 four_pt Four point bi linear interpolation dz ay J J x y j ay 7 diz The four point bi linear interpolation method requires four valid source points aij 1 lt i j lt 2 surrounding the point x y to which geogrid or metgrid must interpolate as illustrated in the figure above Intuitively the method works by linearly interpolating to the x coordinate of the point x y between ai and a12 and between a21 and a22 and then linearly interpolating to the y coordinate using these two interpolated values 2 sixteen_pt Sixteen point overlapping parabolic interpolation Ay Ay a4 Ag e e J e as dzz a3 a34 e e e x y e e a Ay a5 Ay J 2 e e a as as a WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 48 The sixteen_pt overlapping parabolic interpolation method requires sixteen valid source points surrounding the point x y as illustrated in the figure above The method works by fitting one parabola to the points aii ai2 and ai3 and another parabola to the points aj2 aiz and aia for row i 1 lt i lt 4 then an intermediate interpolated value p within row i at the x coordinate of the point is computed by taking an average of the values of the two parabolas evaluated at x with the average being weighted linearly by t
155. eal_nmm exe is successful the following files that are used by wrf exe should be found in the working directory wrfinput_d0l Initial conditions single time level data wrfbdy_d01 Boundary conditions data for multiple time steps To check whether the run is successful look for SUCCESS COMPLETE REAL_NMM INIT at the end of the log file e g rsl out 0000 real_nmm out WRFE NMM V3 User s Guide 4 4 The real_nmm exe portion of the code does not input or output any file relevant to nested domains Initial and boundary conditions for WRF NMM nests are interpolated down from the parent grids during the WRF model run More details regarding the real data test case for 2005 January 23 00 through 24 00 is given in Chapter 5 Real Data Test Case Considerations for Recent Releases e Since a new simple ocean model has been included in the WRF code the old namelist option for activating an ocean mixed layer is no longer suitable The variable OMLCALL has been switched to SF_OCEAN_PHYSICS e The default behavior of the base state has been modified Starting with release version 3 5 the isothermal temperature is no longer zero With this change the base state temperature no longer gets colder than 200 K default in the Registry though a user can override this option with a namelist setting This fixes the problem associated with layers being too thick near the model top A side effect of thinning out these model layers is that user
156. ective Model with non local upward mixing and local downward mixing 7 New in Version 3 0 f Quasi Normal Scale Elimination PBL 4 A TKE prediction option that uses a new theory for stably stratified regions New in Version 3 1 Daytime part uses eddy diffusivity mass flux method with shallow convection mfshconv 1 which is added in Version 3 4 g Mellor Yamada Nakanishi and Niino Level 2 5 PBL 5 Predicts sub grid TKE terms New in Version 3 1 h Mellor Yamada Nakanishi and Niino Level 3 PBL 6 Predicts TKE and other second moment terms New in Version 3 1 i BouLac PBL 8 Bougeault Lacarr re PBL A TKE prediction option New in Version 3 1 Designed for use with BEP urban model j UW Bretherton and Park scheme 9 TKE scheme from CESM climate model New in Version 3 3 k Total Energy Mass Flux TEMF scheme 10 Sub grid total energy prognostic variable plus mass flux type shallow convection New in Version 3 3 l topo_wind Topographic correction for surface winds to represent extra drag from sub grid topography and enhanced flow at hill tops 1 Jimenez and Dudhia JAMC 2012 Works with YSU PBL only New in Version 3 4 A simpler terrain variance related correction 2 New in Version 3 5 Note Two meter temperatures are only available when running with MYJ scheme 2 Summary of PBL Physics Options bl_pbl_physics Scheme Reference Added 1 YSU Hong Noh and Dudhia 2006 MWR 2004 2 MYJ Janjic
157. efault value is geogrid C UNGRIB section Currently this section contains only two variables which determine the output format written by ungrib and the name of the output files 1 OUT_FORMAT A character string set either to wPs st or MM5 If set to MM5 ungrib will write output in the format of the MM5 pregrid program if set to sr ungrib will write output in the format of grib_prep exe if set to wes ungrib will write data in the WPS intermediate format Default value is wes 2 PREFIX A character string that will be used as the prefix for intermediate format files created by ungrib here prefix refers to the string PREFIX in the filename PREFIX YYYY MM DD_HH of an intermediate file The prefix may contain path information either relative or absolute in which case the intermediate files will be written in the directory specified This option may be useful to avoid renaming intermediate files if ungrib is to be run on multiple sources of GRIB data Default value is FILE D METGRID section This section defines variables used only by the metgrid program Typically the user will be interested in the fg_name variable and may need to modify other variables of this section less frequently 1 FG_NAME A list of character strings specifying the path and prefix of ungribbed data files The path may be relative or absolute and the prefix should contain all characters of the filenames up to but not inclu
158. eginning at the bottom or southern most row For example in the figure above the elements of the n x m array would be written in the order x11 X12 X1m X21 X2m lt Xnl Xam When written to the file every element is stored as a 1 2 3 or 4 byte integer in big endian byte order i e for the 4 byte integer ABCD byte A is stored at the lowest address and byte D at the highest although little endian files may be used by setting endian little in the index file for the data set Every element in a file must use the same number of bytes for its storage and of course it is advantageous to use the fewest number of bytes needed to represent the complete range of values in the array When writing the binary data to a file no header record marker or additional bytes should be written For example a 2 byte 1000 x 1000 array should result in a file whose size 1s exactly 2 000 000 bytes Since Fortran unformatted writes add record markers it is not possible to write a geogrid binary formatted file directly from Fortran instead it is recommended that the C routines in read_geogrid c and write_geogrid c in the geogrid src directory be called when writing data either from C or Fortran code WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 30 Similar in format to a field of dominant categories is the case of a field of continuous or real values Like dominant category fields single level continuous fields are first organized as a regula
159. eld smooth _passes Specifies an integer number of passes of the smoothing method to apply to the field Default value is 1 7 REL_PATH A character string specifying the path relative to the path given in the namelist variable geog_data_path A specification is of the general form RES_STRING REL_PATH where RES_STRING is a character string identifying the source or resolution of the data in some unique way and may be specified in the namelist variable geog_data_res and REL_PATH is a path relative to geog_data_path where the index and data tiles for the data source are found More than one rel_path specification may be given in a table section if there are multiple sources or resolutions for the data source just as multiple resolutions may be specified in a sequence delimited by symbols for geog_data_res See also abs_ path No default value 8 ABS_PATH A character string specifying the absolute path to the index and data tiles for the data source A specification is of the general form RES_STRING ABS_PATH where RES_STRING is a character string identifying the source or resolution of the data in some unique way and may be specified in the namelist variable geog_data_res and ABS_PATH is the absolute path to the data source s files More than one abs_path specification may be given in a table section if there are multiple sources or resolutions for the data source just as multiple resolutions may be specified in a sequence delimited by sy
160. ence on model MSTCNVG ON MDL 135 109 surface SFCS U component wind on model U WIND ON MDL SFCS 33 109 surface V component wind on model V WIND ON MDL SFCS 34 109 surface Cloud water on model surface CLD WTR ON MDL SFCS 153 109 Cloud ice on model surface CLD ICE ON MDL SFCS 58 109 Rain on model surface RAIN ON MDL SFCS 170 109 Snow on model surface SNOW ON MDL SFCS 171 109 Cloud fraction on model surface CLD FRAC ON MDL SFCS 71 109 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 17 Omega on model surface OMEGA ON MDL SFCS 39 109 Absolute vorticity on model ABS VORT ON MDL SFCS 41 109 surface Geostrophic streamfunction on STRMFUNC ON MDL 35 109 model surface SFCS Turbulent kinetic energy on TRBLNT KE ON MDL SFC 158 109 model surface Richardson number on model RCHDSN NO ON MDL 254 109 surface SFC Master length scale on model MASTER LENGTH SCALE 226 109 surface Asymptotic length scale on model ASYMPT MSTR LEN SCL 227 109 surface Radar reflectivity on pressure RADAR REFL ON P SFCS 211 100 surface Height on pressure surface HEIGHT OF PRESS SFCS 7 100 Temperature on pressure surface TEMP ON PRESS SFCS 11 100 Potential temperature on pressure POT TEMP ON P SFCS 13 100 surface Dew point temperature on DWPT TEMP ON P SFCS 17 100 pressure surface Specific humidity on pressure SPEC HUM ON P SFCS 51 100 surface Relative humidity on pressure R
161. endent data the start_date end_date and interval_seconds Variables are ignored by geogrid Optionally a location if not the default which is the current working directory where domain files should be written to may be indicated with the opt_output_from_geogrid path variable and the format of these domain files may be changed with io form geogrid In the geogrid namelist record the projection of the simulation domain is defined as are the size and location of all model grids The map projection to be used for the model domains is specified with the map_pro variable and must be set to rotated _11 for WRF NMM Besides setting variables related to the projection location and coverage of model domains the path to the static geographical data sets must be correctly specified with the geog_ data path variable Also the user may select which resolution of static data geogrid will interpolate from using the geog_data_res variable whose value should match one of the resolutions of data in the GEOGRID TBL If the full set of static data are downloaded from the WRF download page possible resolutions include 30s 2m 5m and 10m corresponding to 30 arc second data 2 5 and 10 arc minute data Depending on the value of the wrf_core namelist variable the appropriate GEOGRID TBL file must be used with geogrid since the grid staggerings that WPS interpolates to differ between dynamical cores For the ARW the GEOGRID TBL ARW file
162. entation from the originating center Vtables for common GRIB model output files are provided with the ungrib software WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 3 Vtables are provided for NAM 104 and 212 grids the NAM AWP format GFS the NCEP NCAR Reanalysis archived at NCAR RUC pressure level data and hybrid coordinate data AFWA s AGRMET land surface model output ECMWF and other data sets Users can create their own Vtable for other model output using any of the Vtables as a template further details on the meaning of fields in a Vtable are provided in the section on creating and editing Vtables Ungrib can write intermediate data files in any one of three user selectable formats WPS a new format containing additional information useful for the downstream programs SI the previous intermediate format of the WRF system and MM5 format which is included here so that ungrib can be used to provide GRIB2 input to the MM5 modeling system Any of these formats may be used by WPS to initialize WRF although the WPS format is recommended Program metgrid The metgrid program horizontally interpolates the intermediate format meteorological data that are extracted by the ungrib program onto the simulation domains defined by the geogrid program The interpolated metgrid output can then be ingested by the WRF real program The range of dates that will be interpolated by metgrid are defined in the share namelist record of the WPS namelist file a
163. er XY units whoknows description something stagger M sree 1g Sry Tz HASYS Time south_north west_east FieldType 104 MemoryOrder XY units whoknows description something stagger M Six Sr le 5 sr y 1 HASYSW Time south _north west_east HASYSW FieldType 104 HASYSW MemoryOrder XY HASYSW units whoknows HASYSW description something HASYSW stagger M HASYSW sr x 1 HASYSW sr y 1 HASYNW Time south _north west_east HASYNW FieldType 104 HASYNW MemoryOrder XY HASYNW units whoknows HASYNW description something HASYNW stagger M HASYNW sr x 1 HASYNW sr y 1 HLENW Time south _north west_east HLENW FieldType 104 HLENW MemoryOrder XY HLENW units whoknows HLENW description something HLENW stagger M HLENW sr x 1 HLENW sr y 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide r r r 3 54 float float float float float float float float HLENS Time south _north west_east HLENS FieldType 104 HLENS MemoryOrder XY HLENS units whoknows HLENS description something HLENS stagger M HLENS sr x 1 HLENS sr y 1 HLENSW Time south north west_east HLENSW FieldType 104 HLENSW MemoryOrder XY HLENSW units w
164. er s Guide 3 7 amp share wrf_core NMM max dom 2 start_date 2008 03 24 12 00 00 2008 03 24 12 00 00 ols end_date 2008 03 24 18 00 00 2008 03 24 12 00 00 interval_seconds 21600 io_form_geogrid 2 amp ungrib out_format WPS prefix FILE In the share namelist record the variables that are of relevance to ungrib are the starting and ending times of the coarse domain start date and end_date alternatively start_year start_month start_day start_hour end_year end_month end_day and end_hour and the interval between meteorological data files interval_seconds In the ungrib namelist record the variable out_ format is used to select the format of the intermediate data to be written by ungrib the metgrid program can read any of the formats supported by ungrib and thus any of wes st and mm5 may be specified for out_format although wes is recommended Also in the ungrib namelist the user may specify a path and prefix for the intermediate files with the prefix variable For example if prefix were set to ARGRMET then the intermediate files created by ungrib would be named according to AGRMET YYYY MM DD_HH where YYYY MM DD_HH is the valid time of the data in the file After suitably modifying the namelist wps file a Vtable must be supplied and the GRIB files must be linked or copied to the filenames that are expected by ungrib The WPS is supplied with Vt
165. er s environment For example to set it for WRF NMM core the setenv WRF_NMM_CORE 1 command should be issued To run the WRF NMM with a nest the environment variable WRF_NMM_NEST should also be set to 1 If no core is specified in the environment by setting WRF_core_CORE to 1 the default core is selected currently the Eulerian Mass core for ARW The makefile in the top level directory directs the rest of the build accomplished as a set of recursive invocations of make in the subdirectories of WRF Most of these makefiles include the configure wrf file from the top level directory The order of a complete build is as follows WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 3 1 Make in external directory a make in external io_ gribl grib_share int netcdf for Grib Edition 1 binary and NetCDF implementations of I O API b make in RSL_LITE directory to build communications layer DM_PARALLEL only c make in external esmf_time_f90 directory to build ESMF time manager library d make in external fftpack directory to build FFT library for the global filters e make in other external directories as specified by external target in the configure wrf file 2 Make in the fools directory to build the program that reads the Registry Registry file and auto generates files in the inc directory 3 Make in the frame directory to build the WRF framework specific modules 4 Make in the share directory to build the non core specific mediation
166. er to run metgrid the namelist wps file must be edited In particular the share and metgrid namelist records are of relevance to the metgrid program Examples of these records are shown below amp share wrf_core NMM max dom 2 start_date 2008 03 24 12 00 00 2008 03 24 12 00 00 end_date 2008 03 24 18 00 00 2008 03 24 12 00 00 interval seconds 21600 io form _geogrid 2 amp metgrid fg_name FILE io form metgrid 2 By this point there is generally no need to change any of the variables in the share namelist record since those variables should have been suitably set in previous steps If the share namelist was not edited while running geogrid and ungrib however the WRF dynamical core number of domains starting and ending times interval between meteorological data and path to the static domain files must be set in the share namelist record as described in the steps to run geogrid and ungrib In the metgrid namelist record the path and prefix of the intermediate meteorological data files must be given with fg_name the full path and file names of any intermediate files containing constant fields may be specified with the constants_name variable and the output format for the horizontally interpolated files may be specified with the io form metgrid variable Other variables in the metgrid namelist record namely WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 10 o
167. est top among the data sets C calc_ecmwf_p exe In the course of vertically interpolating meteorological fields the real program requires 3 d pressure and geopotential height fields on the same levels as the other atmospheric fields The calc_ecmwf_p exe utility may be used to create such these fields for use with ECMWF sigma level data sets Given a surface pressure field or log of surface pressure field and a list of coefficients A and B calc_ecmwf_p exe computes the pressure at an ECMWF sigma level k at grid point i j as Pijk Ak Bx Psfcij The list of coefficients used in the pressure computation can be copied from a table appropriate to the number of sigma levels in the data set from http www ecmwf int products data technical model_levels index html This table should be written in plain text to a file eemwf_coeffs in the current working directory for example with 16 sigma levels the file emcwf_coeffs would contain something like 0 0 000000 0 000000000 1 5000 000000 0 000000000 2 93 90 319531 0 001720764 3 14166 304688 0 013197623 4 17346 066406 0 042217135 5 19121 152344 0 093761623 6 19371 250000 0 169571340 7 18164 472656 0 268015683 8 15742 183594 0 384274483 9 12488 050781 0 510830879 10 8881 824219 0 638268471 11 5437 539063 0 756384850 12 2626 257813 0 855612755 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 24 13 783 296631 0 928746223 14 0 000000 0 972985268 r5 0 000000 0 992281914 16 0 000000 1 000000000 Additiona
168. float float float float WRFE NMM V3 XLAT M MemoryOrder XY XLAT M units degrees latitude XLAT M description Latitude on mass grid XLAT M stagger M XLAT M sr_ x 1 XLAT Misr y 1 XLONG M Time south _north west_east XLONG M FieldType 104 XLONG M MemoryOrder XY XLONG M units degrees longitude XLONG M description Longitude on mass grid XLONG M stagger M XLONG Misr x 1 XLONG Misr y 1 XLAT V Time south _north west _east XLAT V FieldType 104 XLAT V MemoryOrder XY XLAT V units degrees latitude XLAT V description Latitude on velocity grid XLAT V stagger Vv XLAT V sr x 1 XLAT V sr y 1 XLONG V Time south _ north west_east LONG V FieldType 104 LONG V MemoryOrder XY LONG V units degrees longitude LONG V description Longitude on velocity grid gt pe OS ps pe OS LONG V stagger V LONG V sr x 1 LONG V sr y 1 E Time south_north west_east E FieldType 104 E MemoryOrder XY E units E description Coriolis E parameter E stagger M E sr x 1 E sr y 1 F Time south_north west_east F FieldType 104 F MemoryOrder XY F units F description Coriolis F parameter F stagger M Fisr x 1 Erse y 1 LANDMASK Time south_north west_east LANDMASK FieldType 104 LANDMASK MemoryOrder
169. following namelist variables must also be set for the indicated domain on which the new B grid will be based WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 37 Variable Name Default Value Description dskmcib 50 0 Grid spacing in km of the centered domain miycorsib mjxcorsib 100 Grid points in the y and x directions respectively of the centered domain nprojib 1 Map projection number 0 none ideal 1 LC 2 PS 3 ME 4 SRCE of the centered domain xlatcib xloncib 45 0 90 0 Central latitude and longitude respectively for the centered domain truelatlib truelat2ib 30 0 60 0 Two true latitudes for the centered domain miyib mjxib 75 Number of grid points in the y and x directions respectively of the fine domain yicornib xjcornib 25 Centered domain y and x locations respectively of the lower left corner point of the fine domain dskmib 25 0 Grid spacing in km of the fine domain An example of a namelist input file for ripdp_wrfnmm called ripdp_wrfnmm_sample in is provided in the RIP tar file in the sample_infiles directory Running RIPDP RIPDP has the following usage ripdp_wrfnmm n namelist_file model data set name basiclall data_file_l data_file_2 data_file_3 In order to provide the user more control when processing the data a namelist needs to be specified by means of the n option with namelist_file specifying the path name of the file containing the namelist
170. for entries in the Registry are described in detail in WRF Tiger Team Documentation The Registry at http www mmm ucar edu wrf WG2 Tigers Registry The Registry program is distributed as part of WRF in the tools directory It is built automatically if necessary when WRF is compiled The executable file is tools registry This program reads the contents of the Registry file Registry Registry and generates files in the inc directory These include files are inserted with cpp include commands into WRF Fortran source files prior to compilation Additional information on these is provided as an appendix to WRF Tiger Team Documentation The Registry The Registry program itself is written in C The source files and makefile are in the tools directory WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 5 Registry Mechanics inc incl Fortran90 wrf exe Figure 6 1 When the user compiles WRF the Registry Program reads Registry Registry producing auto generated sections of code that are stored in files in the inc directory These are included into WRF using the CPP preprocessor and the Fortran compiler In addition to the WRF model itself the Registry Registry file is used to build the accompanying preprocessors such as real_nmm exe for real data simulations Every variable that is an input or an output field is described in the Registry Additionally every variable that is required for parallel communication specifically asso
171. formulation slightly different forms for heat and moisture WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 20 windfarm_opt Wind turbine drag parameterization scheme It represents sub grid effects of specified turbines on wind and TKE fields The physical charateristics of the wind farm is read in from a file and use of the manufacturers specification is recommeded An example of the file is provided in run wind turbine 1 tbl The location of the turbines are read in from a file windturbines txt See README windturbine in WRFV3 directory for more detail New in Version 3 3 and in this version it only works with 2 5 level MYNN PBL option bl_pbl_physics 5 and updated in V3 6 Land model input options usemonalb When set to true it uses monthly albedo fields from geogrid instead of table values rdlai2d When set to true it uses monthly LAI data from geogrid new in V3 6 and the field will also go to wrflowinp file if sst_update is 1 no_mp_heating When set to 1 it turns off latent heating from microphysics When using this option cu_physics should be set to 0 icloud When set to O it turns off cloud effect on optical depth in shortwave radiation options 1 4 and longwave radiation option 1 4 Note since V3 6 this namelist also controls which cloud fraction method to use for radiation isfflx When set to 0 it turns off both sensible and latent heat fluxes from the surface This option works for sf_sfclay_physics 1 5 7 11 ifsno
172. from the namelist Allocates space Initializes remaining variables Reads input data from the WRF Preprocessing System WPS Prepares soil fields for use in the model usually vertical interpolation to the requested levels e Checks to verify soil categories land use land mask soil temperature and sea surface temperature are all consistent with each other e Vertically interpolates to the models computational surfaces e Generates initial condition file e Generates lateral condition file The real_nmm exe program may be run as a distributed memory job but there may be no computational speed up since this program relies heavily on I O and does few computations WRFE NMM V3 User s Guide 4 1 Initialization for Real Data Cases The real_nmm exe code uses data files provided by the WRF Preprocessing System WPS as input The data processed by the WPS typically come from a previously run large scale forecast model The original data are generally in GriB format and are ingested into the WPS by first using ftp to retrieve the raw GriB data from one of the national weather agencies anonymous ftp sites For example a forecast from 2005 January 23 0000 UTC to 2005 January 24 0000 UTC which has original GriB data available at 3h increments will have the following files previously generated by the WPS met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_00 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_03 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_06 00 00 met_nmm d01 2005 01 23_09
173. gits rather than 4 digits timezone 7 0 Offset from Greenwich time UTC for the local time zone iusdaylightrule 1 If flag 1 apply daylight saving rule ptimes 9 0E 09 Times to process This can be a string of times or a series in the form of A B C which is interpreted as times from hour A to hour B every C WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 39 hours ptimeunits h Units of ptimes This can be either h for hours m for minutes or s for seconds iptimes 99999999 Times to process in the form of 8 digit mdate times i e YYMMDDHH A value of 99999999 indicates ptimes is being used instead tacc 1 0 Time tolerance in seconds Any times encountered in the model output that are within tacc seconds of one of the times specified in ptimes or iptimes will be processed flmin frmax fbmin and ftmax 0 05 0 95 0 10 0 90 Left frame limit right frame limit bottom frame limit and top frame limit respectively ntextq 0 Text quality specifier O high 1 medium 2 low ntextcd 0 Text font specifier O complex Times 1 duplex Helvetica Scoffset 0 0 Change initial time to something other than output initial time idotser 0 If flag 1 generate time series ASCII output files no plots idescriptive 1 If flag 1 use more descriptive plot titles icgmsplit 0 If flag 1 split metacode into several files maxfld 10 Reserve memory for RIP
174. h of the programs and a shared namelist record which defines parameters that are used by more than one WPS program Not shown in the figure are additional table files that are used by individual programs These tables provide additional control over the programs operation though they generally do not need to be changed by the user The GEOGRID TBL METGRID TBL and Vtable files are explained later in this document though for now the user need not be concerned with them The build mechanism for the WPS which is very similar to the build mechanism used by the WRF model provides options for compiling the WPS on a variety of platforms When MPICH libraries and suitable compilers are available the metgrid and geogrid programs may be compiled for distributed memory execution which allows large model domains to be processed in less time The work performed by the ungrib program is not amenable to parallelization so ungrib may only be run on a single processor Function of Each WPS Program The WPS consists of three independent programs geogrid ungrib and metgrid Also included in the WPS are several utility programs which are described in the section on utility programs A brief description of each of the three main programs is given below with further details presented in subsequent sections Program geogrid WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 2 The purpose of geogrid is to define the simulation domains and interpolate various terrestria
175. h will enable the HWRF vortex following moving nest capability Check the configure wrf file created and edit for compile options paths if necessary Hint It is helpful to start with something simple such as the serial build If it is successful move on to build smpar or dmpar code Remember to type clean a between each build Hint If you anticipate generating a netCDF file that is larger than 2Gb whether it is a single or multi time period data e g model history file you may set the following environment variable to activate the large file support option from netCDF in c shell setenv WRFIO NCD LARGE FILE SUPPORT 1 Hint If you would like to use parallel netCDF p netCDF developed by Argonne National Lab http trac mcs anl gov projects parallel netcdf you will need to install p netCDF separately and use the environment variable PNETCDF to set the path setenv PNETCDF path to pnetcdf library Hint Since V3 5 compilation may take a bit longer due to the addition of the CLM4 module If you do not intend to use the CLM4 land surface model option you can modify your configure wrf file by removing DWRF USE CLM from ARCH LOCAL ee How to Compile WRF for the NMM core To compile WRF for the NMM dynamic core the following environment variable must be set setenv WRF_NMM CORE 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 8 If compiling for nested runs also set setenv WRF_NMM_NEST 1 Note A sing
176. hain et al 2004 JAS Rogers Black Ferrier Lin Parrish and DiMego 2001 web doc Rogers Black Ferrier Lin Parrish and DiMego 2001 web doc 2004 2004 2000 2004 2008 2009 2010 2008 2011 2009 2009 2012 2012 2013 2013 2014 2014 2014 2010 2000 Number e WSM3 ARW WRF NMM V3 User s Guide C ae 5 5 Ni Nr Nc Nr Ni Ns Ng Nh Nr Ni Ns Ng Milbrandt 2 f 10 ARW Chem Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg 13 SBU Y Lin Qc Qr Qi Qs 14 WDM5 Qc Qr Qi Qs Nn Nc Nr N RW RW 19 NSSL 1 mom Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg Qh Vg NSSL 1 momlfo ARW Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg Thompson i f 28 re ETA ARW NMM Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg Ni Nr Nwf Nif 30 HUJI fast AaRw o o Qc Qr Qs Qg Qi NE NSN Ng c Qr Qs Qg Qh Qip Nc Nr Ns Ng Nip 2 uae ARW o Qic Qid Qnn Nic Nid Nn 85 Eta HWRF RW NMM Qc Qr Qs Qt os Ea Coarse ARWINMM Qe Qr Qs Qe Advects only total condensates Nn CCN number NSSL 2 mom A A A A A A A A A A Longwave Radiation ra_lw_physics a RRTM scheme Rapid Radiative Transfer Model An accurate scheme using look up tables for efficiency Accounts for multiple bands trace gases and microphysics species ra_lw_physics 1 For trace gases the volume mixing ratio values for CO2 330e 6 N20 0 and CH4 0 in pre V3 5 code in V3 5 CO2 379e 6 N20 319e 9 and CH4 1774e 9 See section 2 3 for time varying option This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM WRF
177. he f option causes the WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 42 standard output i e the textual print out from RIP to be written to a file called rip execution name out Without the f option the standard output is sent to the screen The standard output from RIP is a somewhat cryptic sequence of messages that shows what is happening in the program execution As RIP executes it creates either a single metacode file or a series of metacode files depending on whether or not icgmsplit was set to 0 or 1 in the amp userin namelist If only one file was requested the name of that metacode file is rip execution name cgm If separate files were requested for each plot time they are named rip execution name cgmA rip execution name cgmB etc Although the metacode file has a cgm suffix it is not a standard computer graphics metacode CGM file It is an NCAR CGM file that is created by the NCAR Graphics plotting package It can be viewed with any of the standard NCAR CGM translators such as ctrans ictrans or idt A common arrangement is to work in a directory that you ve set up for a particular data set with your UIFs and plot files cgm files in that directory and a subdirectory called data that contains the large number of RIP data files Calculating and Plotting Trajectories with RIP Because trajectories are a unique feature of RIP and require special instructions to create this section is devoted to a general explanation of the trajec
178. he distance of x from an and aj3 Finally the interpolated value at x y is found by performing the same operations as for a row of points but for the column of interpolated values p to the y coordinate of x y 3 average_4pt Simple four point average interpolation The four point average interpolation method requires at least one valid source data point from the four source points surrounding the point x y The interpolated value is simply the average value of all valid values among these four points 4 wt_average_4pt Weighted four point average interpolation The weighted four point average interpolation method can handle missing or masked source data points and the interpolated value is given as the weighted average of all valid values with the weight wi for the source point aj 1 lt i j lt 2 given by w max 0 1 r OAY F Here x is the x coordinate of aj and y is the y coordinate of aij 5 average_1l6pt Simple sixteen point average interpolation The sixteen point average interpolation method works in an identical way to the four point average but considers the sixteen points surrounding the point x y 6 wt_average_16pt Weighted sixteen point average interpolation The weighted sixteen point average interpolation method works like the weighted four point average but considers the sixteen points surrounding x y the weights in this method are given by w max 0 2 x y y where x a
179. he starting time the start date variable will take precedence No default value 12 END_DATE A list of MAX_DOM character strings of the form yyyy mu DD_HH mm ss specifying the ending UTC date of the simulation for each nest The end_date variable is an alternate to specifying end_year end_month end_day and end_hour and if both methods are used for specifying the ending time the end_date variable will take precedence No default value 13 INTERVAL_SECONDS The integer number of seconds between time varying meteorological input files No default value WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 33 14 ACTIVE_GRID A list of MAX_DOM logical values specifying for each grid whether that grid should be processed by geogrid and metgrid Default value is TRUE 15 IO_FORM_GEOGRID The WRF I O API format that the domain files created by the geogrid program will be written in Possible options are 1 for binary 2 for NetCDF 3 for GRIB1 When option 1 is given domain files will have a suffix of int when option 2 is given domain files will have a suffix of nc when option 3 is given domain files will have a suffix of gr1 Default value is 2 NetCDF 16 OPT_OUTPUT_FROM_GEOGRID_PATH A character string giving the path either relative or absolute to the location where output files from geogrid should be written to and read from Default value is 17 DEBUG_LEVEL An integer value indicating the extent to which different types of
180. hoknows HLENSW description something HLENSW stagger M HLENSW sr x 1 HLENSW sr y 1 HLENNW Time south north west _east HLENNW FieldType 104 HLENNW MemoryOrder XY HLENNW units whoknows HLENNW description something HLENNW stagger M HLENNW sr x 1 HLENNW sr y 1 HANIS Time south_north west_east HANIS FieldType 104 HANIS MemoryOrder XY HANTS units whoknows HANTS description something HANIS stagger M HANIS sr x 1 HANIS sr_y 1 HSLOP Time south_north west_east HSLOP FieldType 104 HSLOP MemoryOrder XY HSLOP units whoknows HSLOP description something HSLOP stagger M HSLOP sr x 1 HSLOP sr_ y 1 HANGL Time south _north west_east HANGL FieldType 104 HANGL MemoryOrder XY HANGL units whoknows HANGL description something HANGL stagger M HANGL sr_ x 1 HANGL sr y 1 HZMAX Time south _north west_east HZMAX FieldType 104 HZMAX MemoryOrder XY HZMAX units whoknows HZMAX description something HZMAX stagger M HZMAX sr x 1 HZMAX sr_y 1 HGT M Time south _north west_east HGT M FieldType 104 HGT M MemoryOrder XY HGT M units meters MSL HGT M description Topography height HGT M stagger M HGT M sr x 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 55 HGT M sr y 1 float HGT V Time so
181. horizontal plots the vertical coordinate and levels for horizontal plots cross section end points etc This section has described the basic rules to follow in creating the PST Appendix A in the full RIP User s Guide provides a description of all of the available keywords in alphabetical order Running RIP Each execution of RIP requires three basic things a RIP executable a model data set and a user input file UIF Assuming you have followed the procedures outlined in the previous sections you should have all of these The UIF should have a name of the form rip execution name in where rip execution name is a name that uniquely defines the UIF and the set of plots it will generate The syntax for the executable rip is as follows rip f model data set name rip execution name In the above model data set name is the same model data set name that was used in creating the RIP data set with the program ripdp The model data set name may also include a path name relative to the directory you are working in if the data files are not in your present working directory Again if nested domains were run rip will be run for each domain separately The rip execution name is the unique name for this RIP execution and it also defines the name of the UIF that RIP will look for The intended syntax is to exclude the in extension in rip execution name However if you include it by mistake RIP will recognize it and proceed without trouble T
182. ied in sorc unipost CTLBLK f o Modify specification of variable LSMDEF to change the number of pressure levels LSMDEF 47 o Modify specification of SPLDEF array to change the values of pressure levels 200 500 700 1000 2000 3000 amp 5000 7000 7500 10000 12500 15000 17500 20000 e For model level output all model levels are possible from the highest to the lowest e When using the Noah LSM the soil layers are 0 10 cm 10 40 cm 40 100 cm and 100 200 cm e When using the RUC LSM the soil levels are O cm 5 cm 20 cm 40 cm 160 cm and 300 cm For the RUC LSM it is also necessary to turn on two additional output levels in the wrf_cntrl parm to output 6 levels rather than the default 4 layers for the Noah LSM e For PBL layer averages the levels correspond to 6 layers with a thickness of 30 hPa each e For flight level the levels are 30 m 50 m 80 m 100 m 305 m 457 m 610 m 914 m 1524 m 1829 m 2134 m 2743 m 3658 m 4572 m and 6000 m e For AGL RADAR Reflectivity the levels are 4000 and 1000 m e For surface or shelter level output only the first position of the line needs to be turned on o For example the sample control file parm wrf_cntrl parm has the following entry for surface dew point temperature SURFACE DEWPOINT _ SCAL 4 0 L 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 Based on this entry surface dew point temperature will not be output by
183. ies Default value is 1 i e no separate inland water category 30 ISICE An integer specifying the land use category of ice Default value is 24 31 ISURBAN An integer specifying the land use category of urban areas Default value is 1 32 ISOILWATER An integer specifying the soil category of water Default value is 14 33 MMINLU A character string enclosed in quotation marks indicating which section of WRF s LANDUSE TBL and VEGPARM TBL will be used when looking up parameters for land use categories Default value is uscs WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 44 Description of METGRID TBL Options The METGRID TBL file is a text file that defines parameters of each of the meteorological fields to be interpolated by metgrid Parameters for each field are defined in a separate section with sections being delimited by a line of equality symbols e g Within each section there are specifications each of which has the form of keyword value Some keywords are required in a section while others are optional some keywords are mutually exclusive with other keywords Below the possible keywords and their expected range of values are described 1 NAME A character string giving the name of the meteorological field to which the containing section of the table pertains The name should exactly match that of the field as given in the intermediate files and thus the name given in the Vtable used in generat
184. ies one of these to Registry Registry which is the file that tools registry will use as input The choice of coredepends on settings to the configure script Changes to Registry Registry will be lost permanent changes should be made to Registry core For the WRF ARW model the file is typically Registry EM One of the keywords that the registry program understands is include Some of the ARW Registry files make use of the WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 2 REGISTRY EM_COMMON file This reduces the amount of replicated registry information Currently the Registry EM and Registry EM_CHEM utilize this common registry file When searching for variables previously located in a Registry EM file now look in Registry EM_COMMON Environment variables Certain aspects of the configuration and build are controlled by environment variables the non standard locations of NetCDF libraries or the Perl command which dynamic core to compile machine specific features and optional build libraries such as Grib Edition 2 HDF and parallel netCDF In addition to WRF related environment settings there may also be settings specific to particular compilers or libraries For example local installations may require setting a variable like MPICH_F90 to make sure the correct instance of the Fortran 90 compiler is used by the mpif90 command How the WRF build works There are two steps in building WRF configuration and compilation Configuration The configure s
185. iler SGI MPT dmpar Linux x86_64 gfortran compiler serial Linux x86_64 gfortran compiler dmpar ONDNFWN Note If UPP is compiled with distributed memory it must be linked to a dmpar compilation of WRF Choose one of the configure options listed Check the configure upp file created and edit for compile options paths if necessary For debug flag settings the configure script can be run with a d switch or flag To compile UPP enter the following command compile gt amp compile_upp log amp When compiling with distributed memory serial this command should create 13 14 UPP libraries in UPPV2 1 lib libbacio a libCRTM a libg2 a libg2tmpl a libgfsio a libip a libmpi a libnemsio a ibsfcio a libsigio a libsp a libw3emc a libw3nco a libxmlparse a and three UPP executables in bin unipost exe ndate exe and copygb exe WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 5 To remove all built files as well as the configure upp type clean This action is recommended if a mistake is made during the installation process or a change is made to the configuration or build environment There is also a clean a option which will revert back to a pre install configuration UPP Functionalities The Unified Post Processor e is compatible with WRF v3 3 and higher e can be used to post process WRF ARW WRF NMM NMMB GFS and CFS forecasts Community support provided for WRF based forecasts e can ingest WRF history fi
186. ing the intermediate files This field is required No default value 2 OUTPUT Either yes or no indicating whether the field is to be written to the metgrid output files or not Default value is yes 3 MANDATORY Either yes or no indicating whether the field is required for successful completion of metgrid Default value is no 4 OUTPUT_NAME A character string giving the name that the interpolated field should be output as When a value is specified for output_name the interpolation options from the table section pertaining to the field with the specified name are used Thus the effects of specifying output _name are two fold The interpolated field is assigned the specified name before being written out and the interpolation methods are taken from the section pertaining to the field whose name matches the value assigned to the output_name keyword No default value 5 FROM_INPUT A character string used to compare against the values in the fg_name namelist variable if from_input is specified the containing table section will only be used when the time varying input source has a filename that contains the value of from_input as a substring Thus from_input may be used to specify different interpolation options for the same field depending on which source of the field is being processed No default value 6 OUTPUT_STAGGER The model grid staggering to which the field should be interpolated For ARW this must be one of v v an
187. ing these fields in a Vtable does not prevent that Vtable from also being used for GRIB Edition data For example the Vtable GFS file contains GRIB2 Vtable fields but is used for both 1 degree GRIB1 GFS and 0 5 degree GRIB2 GFS data sets Since Vtables are provided for most known GRIB Edition 2 data sets the corresponding Vtable fields are not described here at present WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 29 Writing Static Data to the Geogrid Binary Format The static geographical data sets that are interpolated by the geogrid program are stored as regular 2 d and 3 d arrays written in a simple binary raster format Users with a new source for a given static field can ingest their data with WPS by writing the data set into this binary format The geogrid format is capable of supporting single level and multi level continuous fields categorical fields represented as dominant categories and categorical fields given as fractional fields for each category The most simple of these field types in terms of representation in the binary format is a categorical field given as a dominant category at each source grid point an example of which is the 30 second USGS land use data set For a categorical field given as dominant categories the data must first be stored in a regular 2 d array of integers with each integer giving the dominant category at the corresponding source grid point Given this array the data are written to a file row by row b
188. initions used by the make utility The Configure wrf file is included by the Makefiles in most of the WRF source distribution Makefiles in tools and external directories do not include configure wrf The configure wrf file in the top level directory is generated each time the configure script is invoked It is also deleted by clean a Thus configure wrf is the place to make temporary changes such as optimization levels and compiling with debugging but permanent changes should be made in the file arch configure_new defaults The configure wrf file is composed of three files arch preamble_new arch postamble_new and arch_configure_new defaults The arch configure_new defaults file contains lists of compiler options for all the supported platforms and configurations Changes made to this file will be permanent This file is used by the configure script to generate a temporary configure wrf file in the top level directory The arch directory also contains the files preamble_new and postamble_new which constitute the generic parts non architecture specific of the configure wrf file that is generated by the configure script The Registry directory contains files that control many compile time aspects of the WRF code The files are named Registry core where core is either EM for builds using the Eulerian Mass ARW core NMM for builds using the NMM core or NMM_NEST for builds using the NMM core with nesting capability The configure script cop
189. into the dyn_nmm solve_m m F subroutine The HALO_NMM_K communication defined in the Registry file in the example above is activated by inserting a small section of code that includes an automatically generated code segment into the solve routine via standard cpp directives ifdef DM_PARALLEL include HALO_NMM _K inc endif The parallel communications are only required when the WRF code is built for distributed memory parallel processing which accounts for the surrounding ifdef The period communications are required when periodic lateral boundary conditions are selected ARW only The Registry syntax is very similar for period and halo communications but the stencil size refers to how many grid cells to communicate in a direction that is normal to the periodic boundary lt Table gt lt CommName gt lt Core gt lt Stencil varlist gt WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 12 period PERIOD_EM_COUPLE_A dyn_em 2 mub mu_1 mu_2 The xpose a data transpose entry is used when decomposed data is to be re decomposed ARW only This is required when doing FFTs in the x direction for polar filtering for example No stencil size is necessary lt Table gt lt CommName gt lt Core gt lt Varlist gt xpose XPOSE_POLAR_FILTER_T dyn_em t_2 t_xxx dum_yyy It is anticipated that many users will add to the the parallel communications portion of the Registry file halo and period It is unlikely that users will add xpose fields Reg
190. ions J Adv Model Earth Syst 4 M02001 DOI 10 1029 2011MS000072 Gu et al 2013 Calibration and validation of lake surface temperature simulations with the coupled WRF Lake model Climatic Change 1 13 10 1007 s10584 013 0978 y Planetary Boundary layer bl_pbl_physics a Yonsei University scheme Non local K scheme with explicit entrainment layer and parabolic K profile in unstable mixed layer b _pbl_physics 1 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM b Mellor Yamada Janjic scheme Eta operational scheme One dimensional prognostic turbulent kinetic energy scheme with local vertical mixing 2 This scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP c NCEP Global Forecast System scheme First order vertical diffusion scheme of Troen and Mahrt 1986 further described in Hong and Pan 1996 The PBL height is determined using an iterative bulk Richardson approach working from the ground upward whereupon the profile of the diffusivity coefficient is specified as a cubic function of the PBL height Coefficient values are obtained by matching the surface layer fluxes A counter gradient flux parameterization is included 3 This scheme is well tested and used operationally at NCEP for HWRF Updated in Version 3 2 d MRF scheme Older version of a with implicit treatment of entrainment layer as part of non local K mixed layer 99 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 14 e ACM2 PBL Asymmetric Conv
191. irection leave as is e_we max_dom 124 End index in x west east direction staggered dimension s_sn max_dom 1 Start index in y south north direction leave as is e_sn max_dom 62 End index in y south north direction staggered dimension For WRF NMM this value must be even s_vert max_dom 1 Start index in z vertical direction leave as is e_vert max_dom 61 End index in z vertical direction staggered dimension This parameter refers to full levels including surface and top Note Vertical dimensions need to be the same for all nests dx max_dom 0534521 Grid length in x direction units in degrees for WRF NMM dy max_dom 0526316 Grid length in y direction units in degrees for WRF NMM p_top_requested 5000 P top used in the model Pa must be available in WPS data ptsgm 42000 Pressure level Pa in which the WRF NMM hybrid coordinate transitions from sigma to pressure eta_levels 1 00 0 99 Model eta levels If this is not specified 0 00 real_nmm exe will provide a set of levels num_metgrid_levels 40 Number of vertical levels in the incoming data type ncdump h to find out grid_id max_dom 1 Domain identifier parent_id max_dom 0 ID of the parent domain Use 0 for the coarsest grid i_parent_start max_dom 1 Defines the LLC of the nest as this I index of the parent domain Use 1 for the coarsest grid j_parent_start max_dom 1 Defines the LLC of the nest in this J index of
192. ires the same Fortran and C compilers used to build the WRF model WPS makes direct calls to the MPI libraries for distributed memory message passing In addition to the netCDF library the WRF I O API libraries which are included with the WRF model tar file are also required In order to run the WRE Domain Wizard which allows you to easily create simulation domains Java 1 5 or later is recommended Required Optional Libraries to Download The netCDF package is required and can be downloaded from Unidata http www unidata ucar edu select DOWNLOADS The netCDF libraries should be installed either in the directory included in the user s path to netCDF libraries or in usr local and its include directory is defined by the environmental variable NETCDF For example setenv NETCDF path to netcdf library To execute netCDF commands such as ncdump and ncgen path to netcdf bin may also need to be added to the user s path Hint When compiling WRF codes on a Linux system using the PGI Intel g95 gfortran compiler make sure the netCDF library has been installed using the same PGI Intel g95 gfortran compiler Hint On NCAR s IBM computer the netCDF library is installed for both 32 bit and 64 bit memory usage The default would be the 32 bit version If you would like to use the 64 bit version set the following environment variable before you start compilation setenv OBJECT_MODE 64 If distributed memory jobs will be
193. is in meters for the polar lambert and mercator projection and in degrees longitude for the lat lon projection for NMM the grid distance is in degrees longitude Grid distances for nests are determined recursively based on values specified for parent_grid_ratio and parent_id No default value 11 DY A real value specifying the nominal grid distance in the y direction where the map scale factor is 1 For ARW the grid distance is in meters for the polar lambert and mercator projection and in degrees latitude for the lat 1lon projection for NMM the grid distance is in degrees latitude Grid distances for nests are determined recursively based on values specified for parent grid ratio and parent_id No default value Note For the rotated latitude longitude grid used by WRF NMM the grid center is the equator DX and DY are constant within this rotated grid framework However in a true Earth sense the grid spacing in kilometers varies slightly between the center latitude and the northern and southern edges due to convergence of meridians away from the equator This behavior is more notable for domains covering a wide range of latitudes Typically DX is set to be slightly larger than DY to counter the effect of meridional convergence and keep the unrotated true earth grid spacing more uniform over the entire grid The relationship between the fraction of a degree specification for the E grid and the more typical grid
194. istry Package The package option in the Registry file associates fields with particular physics packages Presently it is mandatory that all 4 D arrays be assigned Any 4 D array that is not associated with the selected physics option at run time is either allocated used for IO nor communicated All other 2 D and 3 D arrays are eligible for use with a package assignment but that is not required The purpose of the package option is to allow users to reduce the memory used by the model since only necessary fields are processed An example for a microphysics scheme is given below lt Table gt lt PackageName gt lt NMLAssociated gt lt Variables gt package kesslerscheme mp_physics 1 moist qv qc qr The entry keyword is package and is associated with the single physics option listed under lt NMLAssociated gt The package is referenced in the code in Fortran IF and CASE statements by the name given in the lt PackageName gt column instead of the more confusing and typical IF mp_physics 1 approach The lt Variables gt column must start with a dash character and then a blank for historical reasons of backward compatibility The syntax of the lt Variables gt column then is a 4 D array name followed by a colon and then a comma separated list of the 3 D arrays constituting that 4 D amalgamation In the example above the 4 D array is moist and the selected 3 D arrays are qv gc and qr If more than one 4 D arr
195. ization of the snow field in a cloud model J Climate Appl Meteor 22 1065 1092 Miyakoda K and J Sirutis 1986 Manual of the E physics Available from Geophysical Fluid Dynamics Laboratory Princeton University P O Box 308 Princeton NJ 08542 Mlawer E J S J Taubman P D Brown M J Iacono and S A Clough 1997 Radiative transfer for inhomogeneous atmosphere RRTM a validated correlated k model for the longwave J Geophys Res 102 D14 16663 16682 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 57 Pan H L and W S Wu 1995 Implementing a Mass Flux Convection Parameterization Package for the NMC Medium Range Forecast Model NMC Office Note No 409 40pp Available from NCEP EMC W NP2 Room 207 WWB 5200 Auth Road Washington DC 20746 4304 Pan H L and L Mahrt 1987 Interaction between soil hydrology and boundary layer developments Boundary Layer Meteor 38 185 202 Rutledge S A and P V Hobbs 1984 The mesoscale and microscale structure and organization of clouds and precipitation in midlatitude cyclones XII A diagnostic modeling study of precipitation development in narrow cloud frontal rainbands J Atmos Sci 20 2949 2972 Sadourny R 1975 The Dynamics of Finite Difference Models of the Shallow Water Equations J Atmos Sci 32 No 4 pp 680 689 Schwarzkopf M D and S B Fels 1985 Improvements to the algorithm for computing CO2 transmissivities and cooling rates J Geophys Res
196. l Integrated Modeling System scheme it represents the shallow convection process by using eddy diffusion and the pal algorithm and couples directly to the YSU PBL scheme New in Version 3 5 Other physics options a gwd_opt Gravity wave drag option Can be activated when grid size is greater than 10 km May be beneficial for simulations longer than 5 days and over a large domain with mountain ranges Default gwd_opt 0 b mommix Coefficient used in the calculation of momentum mixing tendency terms Default mommix 0 7 Only used with old SAS cumulus scheme 4 c h_diff Coefficient used in the calculation of horizontal momentum diffusion terms Default h_diff 0 1 Only used when environment variable HWRF is set WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 19 d sfenth Enthalpy flux factor Default sfenth 1 0 Only used with GFDL surface scheme d coz2tf CO2 transmission coefficient option Default coztf 0 sas_pgcon Convectively forced pressure gradient factor SAS schemes 14 and 84 Default sas_pgcon 0 55 gfs_alpha Boundary layer depth factor Default gfs_alpha 1 GFS PBL scheme 3 sas_mass_flux Mass flux limit SAS scheme Default sas_mass_flux 9 10 SAS scheme 84 var_ric Placeholder for the use of variable critical Richardson number Ric in GFS PBL scheme will be available in HWRF V3 5a release Default var_ric 0 to use constant Ric else set var_ric 1 to use variable coef_ric_l Placeholder for the coefficient u
197. l data it can often be helpful to check the resulting interpolated fields in order to make adjustments the interpolation methods used by geogrid or metgrid By using the NetCDF format for the geogrid and metgrid I O forms a variety of visualization tools that read NetCDF data may be used to check the domain files processed by geogrid or the horizontally interpolated meteorological fields produced by metgrid In order to set the file format for geogrid and metgrid to NetCDF the user should specify 2 as the io form geogrid and io form metgridin the WPS namelist file Note 2 is the default setting for these options amp share io form geogrid 2 amp metgrid io form metgrid 2 Among the available tools the ncdump ncview and new RIP4 programs may be of interest The ncdump program is a compact utility distributed with the NetCDF libraries that lists the variables and attributes in a NetCDF file This can be useful in particular for checking the domain parameters e g west east dimension south north dimension or domain center point in geogrid domain files or for listing the fields in a file The ncview program provides an interactive way to view fields in NetCDF files Also for users wishing to produce plots of fields suitable for use in publications the new release of the RIP4 program may be of interest The new RIP4 is capable of plotting horizontal contours map backgrounds and overlaying multiple fields within the sa
198. l data sets to the model grids The simulation domains are defined using information specified by the user in the geogrid namelist record of the WPS namelist file namelist wps In addition to computing the latitude longitude and map scale factors at every grid point geogrid will interpolate soil categories land use category terrain height annual mean deep soil temperature monthly vegetation fraction monthly albedo maximum snow albedo and slope category to the model grids by default Global data sets for each of these fields are provided through the WRF download page and because these data are time invariant they only need to be downloaded once Several of the data sets are available in only one resolution but others are made available in resolutions of 30 2 5 and 10 here denotes arc seconds and denotes arc minutes The user need not download all available resolutions for a data set although the interpolated fields will generally be more representative if a resolution of data near to that of the simulation domain is used However users who expect to work with domains having grid spacings that cover a large range may wish to eventually download all available resolutions of the static terrestrial data Besides interpolating the default terrestrial fields the geogrid program is general enough to be able to interpolate most continuous and categorical fields to the simulation domains New or additional data sets may be interpo
199. l value specifying for ARW the longitude that is parallel with the y axis in the Lambert conformal and polar stereographic projections For the regular latitude longitude projection this value gives the rotation about the earth s geographic poles For NMM stand_lon is ignored No default value 20 POLE_LAT For the latitude longitude projection for ARW the latitude of the North Pole with respect to the computational latitude longitude grid in which 90 0 latitude is at the bottom of a global domain 90 0 latitude is at the top and 180 0 longitude is at the center Default value is 90 0 21 POLE_LON For the latitude longitude projection for ARW the longitude of the North Pole with respect to the computational lat lon grid in which 90 0 latitude is at the bottom of a global domain 90 0 latitude is at the top and 180 0 longitude is at the center Default value is 0 0 22 GEOG_DATA_PATH A character string giving the path either relative or absolute to the directory where the geographical data directories may be found This path is the WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 37 one to which rel_path specifications in the GEOGRID TBL file are given in relation to No default value 23 OPT_GEOGRID_TBL_PATH A character string giving the path either relative or absolute to the GEOGRID TBL file The path should not contain the actual file name as GEOGRID TBL is assumed but should only give the path where this file is located D
200. lated to the simulation domain through the use of the table file GEOGRID TBL The GEOGRID TBL file defines each of the fields that will be produced by geogrid it describes the interpolation methods to be used for a field as well as the location on the file system where the data set for that field is located Output from geogrid is written in the WRF I O API format and thus by selecting the NetCDF I O format geogrid can be made to write its output in NetCDF for easy visualization using external software packages including ncview NCL and RIP4 Program ungrib The ungrib program reads GRIB files degribs the data and writes the data in a simple format called the intermediate format see the section on writing data to the intermediate format for details of the format The GRIB files contain time varying meteorological fields and are typically from another regional or global model such as NCEP s NAM or GFS models The ungrib program can read GRIB Edition 1 and if compiled with a GRIB2 option GRIB Edition 2 files GRIB files typically contain more fields than are needed to initialize WRF Both versions of the GRIB format use various codes to identify the variables and levels in the GRIB file Ungrib uses tables of these codes called Vtables for variable tables to define which fields to extract from the GRIB file and write to the intermediate format Details about the codes can be found in the WMO GRIB documentation and in docum
201. layer routines including WRF I O modules that call the I O API 5 Make in the phys directory to build the WRF model layer routines for physics non core specific 6 Make in the dyn_ core directory for core specific mediation layer and model layer subroutines 7 Make in the main directory to build the main programs for WRF and symbolically link to create executable files location depending on the build case that was selected as the argument to the compile script e g compile em_real or compile nmm_real Source files F and in some of the external directories F90 are preprocessed to produce f90 files which are input to the compiler As part of the preprocessing Registry generated files from the ine directory may be included Compiling the f90 files results in the creation of object 0 files that are added to the library main libwrflib a Most of the external directories generate their own library file The linking step produces the wrf exe and real_nmm exe executables The o files and f90 files from a compile are retained until the next invocation of the clean script The f90 files provide the true reference for tracking down run time errors that refer to line numbers or for sessions using interactive debugging tools such as dbx or gdb WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 4 Registry Tools for automatic generation of application code from user specified tables provide significant software productivity benefits in developmen
202. le domain can be specified even if WRF_NMM_NEST is set to 1 If compiling for HWRF also set setenv HWRF 1 Once these environment variables are set enter the following command compile nmm_real Note that entering compile h or compile produces a listing of all of the available compile options only nmm_real is relevant to the WRF NMM core To remove all object files except those in external and executables type clean To remove all built files in ALL directories as well as the configure wrf type clean a This action is recommended if a mistake is made during the installation process or if the Registry NMM or configure wrf files have been edited When the compilation is successful two executables are created in main real_nmm exe WRF NMM initialization wrf exe WRF NMM model integration These executables are linked to run and test nmm_real The test nmm_real and run directories are working directories that can be used for running the model Beginning with V3 5 the compression function in netCDF4 is supported This option will typically reduce the file size by more than 50 It will require netCDF4 to be installed with the option enable netcdf 4 Before compiling WRF you will need to set the environment variable NETCDF4 In a C shell environment type WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 9 setenv NETCDF4 1 followed by configure and compile More details on the WRF NMM core physics options and running th
203. le it is not required that the lt Sym gt and lt DNAME gt use the same character string it is highly recommended The lt DESCRIP gt and the lt UNITS gt are optional however they are a good way to supply self documentation to the Registry Since the lt DESCRIP gt value is used in the automatic code generation restrict the variable description to 40 characters or less From this example we can add new requirements for a variable Suppose that the variable to be added is not specific to any dynamical core We would change the lt Use gt column entry of dyn_nmm to misc for miscellaneous The misc entry is typical of fields used in physics packages Only dynamics variables have more than a single time level and this introductory material is not suitable for describing the impact of multiple time periods on the registry program For the lt Stagger gt option users may select any subset from X Y Z or where the dash character signifies no staggering The lt IO gt column handles file input and output and it handles the nesting specification for the field The file input and output uses three letters i input r restart and h history If the field is to be in the input file to the model the restart file from the model and the history file from the model the entry would be irh To allow more flexibility the input and history fields are associated with streams The user may specify a digit after the i or the h
204. leaf Forest Deciduous Broadleaf Forest Mixed Forests Closed Shrublands Open Shrublands Woody Savannas Savannas Grasslands 1 0 CO YF DJ uan BY GPRD ee eK Permanent Wetlands WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 12 Croplands 13 Urban and Built Up 14 Cropland Natural Vegetation Mosaic 15 Snow and Ice 16 Barren or Sparsely Vegetated 17 Water 18 Wooded Tundra 19 Mixed Tundra 20 Barren Tundra Table 3 16 category Soil Categories Soil Category Soil Description 1 Sand 2 Loamy Sand 3 Sandy Loam 4 Silt Loam 5 Silt 6 Loam 7 Sandy Clay Loam 8 Silty Clay Loam 9 Clay Loam 10 Sandy Clay 11 Silty Clay 12 Clay 13 Organic Material 14 Water 15 Bedrock 16 Other land ice WPS Output Fields Below a listing of the global attributes and fields that are written to the geogrid program s output files is given This listing is of the output from the ncdump program when run on a typical geo_nmm dO1 nc file netcdf geo_nmm d01 dimensions Time UNLIMITED 1 currently DateStrLen 19 west_east 19 south north 39 land_cat 24 soil cat 16 month 12 variables char Times Time DateStrLen float XLAT M Time south_north west _east XLAT M FieldType 104 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 52 float float float float
205. les wrfout in two formats netCDF and binary The Unified Post Processor is divided into two parts 1 Unipost e Interpolates the forecasts from the model s native vertical coordinate to NWS standard output levels e g pressure height and computes mean sea level pressure If the requested parameter is on a model s native level then no vertical interpolation is performed e Computes diagnostic output quantities e g convective available potential energy helicity radar reflectivity A full list of fields that can be generated by unipost is shown in Table 3 e Except for new capabilities of post processing GFS CFS and additions of many new variables UPP uses the same algorithms to derive most existing variables as were used in WPP The only three exceptions changes from the WPP are gt Computes RH w r t ice for GFS but w r t water for all other supported models WPP computed RH w r t water only gt The height and wind speed at the maximum wind level is computed by assuming the wind speed varies quadratically in height in the location of the maximum wind level The WPP defined maximum wind level at the level with the maximum wind speed among all model levels gt The static tropopause level is obtained by finding the lowest level that has a temperature lapse rate of less than 2 K km over a 2 km depth above it The WPP defined the tropopause by finding the lowest level that has a mean temperature lapse rate of 2 K
206. line within the FSG is a plot specification line PSL because it describes what will appear in a plot A plot is defined as one call to a major plotting routine e g a contour plot a vector plot a map background etc Hence a FSG that has three PSLs in it will result in a frame that has three overlaid plots Each PSL contains several plot specification settings PSSs of the form keyword value value value where keyword is a 4 character code word that refers to a specific aspect of the plot Some keywords need one value some need two and some need an arbitrary number of values Keywords that require more than one value should have those values separated by commas All the PSSs within a PSL must be separated by semicolons but the final PSS in a PSL must have no semicolon after it this is how RIP identifies the end of the PSL Any amount of white space i e blanks or tabs is allowed anywhere in a PSS or PSL because all white space will be removed after the line is read into RIP The use of white space can help make your PST more readable The order of the PSSs in a PSL does not matter though the common convention is to first specify the feld keyword then the ptyp keyword and then other keywords in no particular order A PSL may be as long as 240 characters including spaces However if you want to keep all your text within the width of your computer screen then a greater than symbol gt at the end of the line can be use
207. ll end times also control when the nest domain integrations end Note All start and end times are used by real_nmm exe One may use either run_days run_hours etc or end_year month day hour etc to control the length of model integration but run_days run_hours takes precedence over the end times The program real_nmm exe uses start and end times only interval_seconds 10800 Time interval between incoming real data which will be the interval between the lateral boundary condition files This parameter is only used by real_nmm exe history_interval History output file interval in minutes max_dom 60 history_interval_d history output file interval in days integer only max_dom 1 used as an alternative to history interval history output file interval in hours integer history_interval_h only used as an alternative to max_dom 1 history interval history output file interval in minutes integer history_interval_m only used as an alternative to max_dom 1 history interval and is equivalent to WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 25 Variable Names Value Description Example history interval history output file interval in seconds integer history_interval_s only used as an alternative to max_dom 1 history interval frames_per_outfile 1 Output times per history output file used to split max_dom output files into smaller pieces tstart max_dom 0 This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Forecast
208. lly if soil height or soil geopotential 3 d temperature and 3 d specific humidity fields are available calc_ecmwf_p exe computes a 3 d geopotential height field which is required to obtain an accurate vertical interpolation in the real program Given a set of intermediate files produced by ungrib and the file ecmwf_coeffs calc_ecmwf_p loops over all time periods in namelist wps and produces an additional intermediate file PRES YYYY MM DD_HH for each time which contains pressure and geopotential height data for each full sigma level as well as a 3 d relative humidity field This intermediate file should be specified to metgrid along with the intermediate data produced by ungrib by adding PRES to the list of prefixes in the fg_name namelist variable D plotgrids exe The plotgrids exe program is an NCAR Graphics based utility whose purpose is to plot the locations of all nests defined in the namelist wps file The program operates on the namelist wps file and thus may be run without having run any of the three main WPS programs Upon successful completion plotgrids produces an NCAR Graphics metafile gmeta which may be viewed using the idt command The coarse domain is drawn to fill the plot frame a map outline with political boundaries is drawn over the coarse domain and any nested domains are drawn as rectangles outlining the extent of each nest This utility may be useful particularly during initial placement of domains at whi
209. lt Table gt lt Type gt lt Sym gt rconfig integer run_days rconfig integer start_year lt How set gt lt Nentries gt lt Default gt namelist time_control 1 0 namelist time_control max_domains 1993 The keyword for this type of entry in the Registry file is reonfig run time configuration As with the other model fields such as state and il the lt Type gt column assigns the Fortran kind of the variable integer real or logical The name of the variable in the WRF namelist is given in the lt Sym gt column and is part of the derived data type structure as are the state fields There are a number of Fortran namelist records in the file namelist input Each namelist variable is a member of one of the specific namelist records The previous example shows that run_days and start_year are both members of the time_control record The lt Nentries gt column refers to the dimensionality of the namelist variable number of entries For most variables the lt Nentries gt column has two eligible values either Z signifying that the scalar entry is valid for all domains or max_domains signifying that the variable is an array with a value specified for each domain Finally a default value is given This permits a namelist entry to be removed from the namelist input file if the default value is acceptable The registry program constructs two subroutines for each namelist variable one to retrieve the value of the namelist variable and the
210. luding a different map background but presumably with substantial overlap between the two grids and a horizontal resolution similar to the effective resolution of the E grid The E grid data is then bilinearly interpolated to the new B grid in RIPDP and the new B grid data is then written out to the RIPDP output data files With this method the fact that the original data was on the E grid is completely transparent to the RIP plotting program linterp 1 New projection No direct relationshin It should be noted that if iinterp 1 is set grid points in the new domain that are outside the original E grid domain will be assigned a missing value by RIPDP RIP the plotting program handles missing value data inconsistently Some parts of the code are designed to deal with it gracefully and other parts are not Therefore it is best to make sure that the new domain is entirely contained within the original E grid domain Unfortunately there is no easy way to do this RIPDP does not warn you when your new domain contains points outside the original E grid The best way to go about it is by trial and error define an interpolation domain run RIPDP then plot a 2 D dot point field such as map factor on dot points feld dmap in color contours and see if any points do not get WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 36 plotted If any are missing adjust the parameters for the interpolation domain and try again RIPDP Namelist The namelist
211. lue of the vertical index of the source field is used if DLEVEL is all then all levels from the field specified by the level_template keyword are used to fill the corresponding levels in the field one at a time No default value 17 LEVEL_TEMPLATE A character string giving the name of a field from which a list of vertical levels should be obtained and used as a template This keyword is used in conjunction with a i11_1ev specification that uses a11 in the DLEVEL part of its specification No default value 18 MASKED Either lanad water or both Setting MASKED to land or water indicates that the field should not be interpolated to WRF land or water points respectively however setting MASKED to both indicates that the field should be interpolated to WRF land points using only land points in the source data and to WRF water points using only water points in the source data When a field is masked or invalid the static LANDMASK field will be used to determine which model grid points the field should be interpolated to invalid points will be assigned the value given by the FILL MISSING keyword Whether a source data point is land or water is determined by the masks specified using the INTERP_LAND MASK and INTERP_WATER_MASK options Default value is null i e the field is valid for both land and water points 19 MISSING_VALUE A real number giving the value in the input field that is assumed to represent missing
212. ly designed for sigma coordinate level output from the PSU NCAR Mesoscale Model MM4 MM5S but was generalized in April 2003 to handle data sets with any vertical coordinate and in particular output from both the WRF NMM and WRF ARW modeling systems It is strongly recommended that users read the complete RIP User s Guide found at http www mmm ucar edu wrf users docs ripug pdf A condensed version is given here for a quick reference RIP Software Requirements The program is designed to be portable to any UNIX system that has a Fortran 77 or Fortran 90 compiler and the NCAR Graphics library preferably 4 0 or higher The NetCDF library is also required for I O RIP Environment Settings An important environment variable for the RIP system is RIP_ROOT RIP_ROOT should be assigned the path name of the directory where all the RIP program and utility files color tbl stationlist ascii files psadilookup dat will reside The natural choice for the RIP_ROOT directory is the RIP subdirectory that is created after the RIP tar file is unpacked For simplicity define RIP_ROOT in one of the UNIX start up files For example add the following to the shell configuration file such as login or cshre setenv RIP_ROOT path to RIP Obtaining the RIP Code The RIP4 package can be downloaded from http www dtcenter org wrf nmm users downloads Once the sar file is obtained gunzip and untar the file tar zxvf RIP4_v4 4 TAR gz W
213. m in running metgrid gt 1s drwxr xr x 2 4096 arch rwxr xr x 1 1672 clean rwxr xr x 1 3510 compile rw r r 1 85973 compile output rwxr xr x 1 4257 configure rw r r 1 2486 configure wps rw r r 1 154946888 FILE 2008 03 24 12 rw r r 1 154946888 FILE 2008 03 24 18 rw r r 1 1957004 geo nmm d0Ol nc rw r r 1 4745324 geo_nmm d02 nc drwxr xr x 4 4096 geogrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 geogrid exe gt geogrid src geogrid exe rw r r 1 11169 geogrid log lrwxrwxrwx 1 38 GRIBFILE AAA gt data gfs gfs_ 080324 12 00 lrwxrwxrwx 1 38 GRIBFILE AAB gt data gfs gfs_ 080324 12 06 rwxr xr x 1 1328 link grib csh rw r r 1 5217648 met_nmm d01 2008 03 24 12 00 00 nc rw r r 1 5217648 met_nmm d01 2008 03 24 18 00 00 nc SEwors sr gt 12658200 met_nmm d02 2008 03 24 12 00 00 nc drwxr xr x 3 4096 metgrid lrwxrwxrwx 1 23 metgrid exe gt metgrid src metgrid exe WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 11 rw r r 1 65970 metgrid log rw r r 1 1094 namelist wps rw r r 1 1987 namelist wps all_ options rw r r 1 1075 namelist wps global rw f r 1 652 namelist wps nmm rw r r 1 4786 README drwxr xr x 4 4096 ungrib lrwxrwxrwx 1 21 ungrib exe gt ungrib src ungrib exe rw r r 1 1418 ungrib log rw r r 1 27787 ungrib output drwxr xr x 3 4096 util lrwxrwxrwx 1 33 Vtable gt ungrib Variable Tables Vtable GFS Creating Nested Domains wi
214. mbols for geog_data_res See also rel_path No default value 9 OUTPUT_STAGGERR A character string specifying the grid staggering to which the field is to be interpolated For ARW domains possible values are u v and m for NMM domains possible values are HH and vv Default value for ARW is m default value for NMM is Hu 10 LANDMASK_WATER One or more comma separated integer values giving the indices of the categories within the field that represents water When landmask_ water is specified in the table section of a field for which dest_type categorical the LANDMASK field will be computed from the field using the specified categories as the WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 40 water categories The keywords landmask_ water and landmask_land are mutually exclusive Default value is null i e a landmask will not be computed from the field 11 LANDMASK_LAND One or more comma separated integer values giving the indices of the categories within the field that represents land When landmask_ water is specified in the table section of a field for which dest_type categorical the LANDMASK field will be computed from the field using the specified categories as the land categories The keywords landmask water and landmask_ land are mutually exclusive Default value is null i e a landmask will not be computed from the field 12 MASKED Either 1and or water indicating that the field is not valid at land or water points respectively If th
215. me plot Output from the ungrib program is always written in a simple binary format either WPS SI or MMS5 so software for viewing NetCDF files will almost certainly be of no use However an NCAR Graphics based utility plotfmt is supplied with the WPS source code This utility produces contour plots of the fields found in an intermediate WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 22 format file If the NCAR Graphics libraries are properly installed the plotfmt program is automatically compiled along with other utility programs when WPS is built WPS Utility Programs Besides the three main WPS programs geogrid ungrib and metgrid there are a number of utility programs that come with the WPS and which are compiled in the util directory These utilities may be used to examine data files visualize the location of nested domains compute pressure fields and compute average surface temperature fields A avg_tsfc exe The avg_tsfc exe program computes a daily mean surface temperature given input files in the intermediate format Based on the range of dates specified in the share namelist section of the namelist wps file and also considering the interval between intermediate files avg_tsfc exe will use as many complete days worth of data as possible in computing the average beginning at the starting date specified in the namelist If a complete day s worth of data is not available no output file will be written and
216. mn that is used so arrays will be completely filled e_we e_sn for both mass and wind quantities but the phantom column does not impact the integration In this example the x dimension of the computational grid is 4 wheras the y dimension is 5 By definition e_we and e_sn are one plus the computational grid such that for this example e_we 5 and e_sn 6 Note also that the number of computational rows must be odd so the value for e_sm must always be EVEN 9 GEOG_DATA_RES A list of MAX_DOM character strings specifying for each nest a corresponding resolution or list of resolutions separated by symbols of source data to be used when interpolating static terrestrial data to the nest s grid For each nest this string should contain a resolution matching a string preceding a colon ina rel_path or abs_path Specification see the description of GEOGRID TBL options in the GEOGRID TBL file for each field If a resolution in the string does not match any such string ina rel path Or abs_ path specification for a field in GEOGRID TBL a default resolution of data for that field if one is specified will be used If multiple resolutions match the first resolution to match a string in a rel_path Of abs_path specification in the GEOGRID TBL file will be used Default value is default WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 35 10 DX A real value specifying the grid distance in the x direction where the map scale factor is 1 For ARW the grid distance
217. n Below is a summary of physics options that are well tested for WRF NMM and are used operationally at NCEP for the North America Mesoscale NAM Model amp physics Identifying Physics options Number mp_physics max_dom Microphysics Ferrier ra_lw_physics 99 Long wave radiation GFDL Fels Schwarzkopf ra_sw_physics Short wave radiation GFDL Lacis Hansen sf_sfclay_physics Surface layer Janjic scheme sf_surface_physics Noah Land Surface bl_pbl_physics Boundary layer Mellor Yamada Janjic TKE cu_physics Cumulus Betts Miller Janjic scheme num_soil_layers Number of soil layers in land surface model Description of Namelist Variables The settings in the namelist input file are used to configure WRF NMM This file should be edited to specify dates number and size of domains time step physics options and output options When modifying the namelist input file be sure to take into account the following points time_step The general rule for determining the time step of the coarsest grid follows from the CFL criterion If d is the grid distance between two neighboring points in diagonal direction on the WRF NMM s E grid dt is the time step and c is the phase speed of the fastest process the CFL criterion requires that WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 22 c dt d sqrt 2 lt 1 This gives dt lt d sqrt 2 c A very simple approach is to use 2 25 x grid spacing in km or about 330 x
218. n blocks that are used in several routines in RIP o pointers an include file that contains pointer declarations used in some of the routines in RIP o Makefile a secondary make file used to compile and link RIP e stationlist a file containing observing station location information Installing the RIP Code RIP uses a build mechanism similar to that used by the WRF model First issue the configure command followed by the compile command configure Choose one of the configure options listed Check the configure rip file created and edit for compile options paths if necessary compile gt amp compile_rip log amp WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 33 A successful compilation will result in the creation of several object files and executables in the RIP sre directory The makefile is also set up to create symbolic links in the RIP directory to the actual executables in the RIP sre directory To remove all built files as well as the configure rip type clean This action is recommended if a mistake is made during the installation process RIP Functionalities RIP can be described as quasi interactive You specify the desired plots by editing a formatted text file The program is executed and an NCAR Graphics CGM file is created which can be viewed with any one of several different metacode translator applications The plots can be modified or new plots created by changing the user input file and re executing RIP Some of the ba
219. n by the simple average of the values of all of the shaded source grid cells Land Use and Soil Categories in the Static Data The default land use and soil category data sets that are provided as part of the WPS static data tar file contain categories that are matched with the USGS categories described in the VEGPARM TBL and SOILPARM TBL files in the WRF run directory WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 50 Descriptions of the 24 land use categories and 16 soil categories are provided in the tables below Table 1 USGS 24 category Land Use Categories Land Use Category Land Use Description 1 Urban and Built up Land 2 Dryland Cropland and Pasture 3 Irrigated Cropland and Pasture 4 Mixed Dryland Irrigated Cropland and Pasture 5 Cropland Grassland Mosaic 6 Cropland Woodland Mosaic 7 Grassland 8 Shrubland 9 Mixed Shrubland Grassland 10 Savanna 11 Deciduous Broadleaf Forest 12 Deciduous Needleleaf Forest 13 Evergreen Broadleaf 14 Evergreen Needleleaf 15 Mixed Forest 16 Water Bodies 17 Herbaceous Wetland 18 Wooden Wetland 19 Barren or Sparsely Vegetated 20 Herbaceous Tundra 21 Wooded Tundra 22 Mixed Tundra 23 Bare Ground Tundra 24 Snow or Ice Table 2 IGBP Modified MODIS 20 category Land Use Categories Land Use Category Land Use Description Evergreen Needleleaf Forest Evergreen Broadleaf Forest Deciduous Needle
220. nd 00 Two digit second of stop time for backward DFI integration dfi_fwdstop_year 2005 Four digit year of stop time for forward DFI integration For a model that starts from 2005042700 and using the TDFI method this example specifies the end of the 60 minute forward integration the forward segment begins at 20050426 2330 dfi_fwdstop_month 04 Two digit month of stop time for forward DFI integration dfi_fwdstop_day 27 Two digit day of stop time for forward DFI integration dfi_fwdstop_hour 00 Two digit hour of stop time for forward DFI integration dfi_fwdstop_minute 30 Two digit minute of stop time for forward DFI integration dfi_fwdstop_second 00 Two digit second of stop time for forward DFI integration amp logging compute_slaves_silent true Switch to enable compute_slaves_silent false or disable compute_slaves_silent true the wrf_message calls on the slave nodes where the wrf_dm_on_monitor false i0_servers_ silent true Switch to enable io_servers_silent false or disable io_servers_silent true the wrf_message calls on the IO servers stderr_logging Switch to enable stderr_logging 1 or disable stderr_logging 0 the output of stderr WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 41 How to Run WRF for the NMM Core Note For software requirements for running WRF how to obtain the WRF package and ho
221. nd Goddard radiation options aer_opt 2 Either AOD or AOD plus Angstrom exponent single scattering albedo and cloud asymmetry parameter can be provided via constant values from namelist or 2D input fields via auxiliary input stream 15 Aerosol type can be set too New in V3 6 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 8 Summary of Radiation Physics Options ra_sw_physics Scheme Reference Added 1 Dudhia Dudhia 1989 JAS 2000 2 Goddard Chou and Suarez 1994 NASA Tech Memo 2000 3 CAM Collins et al 2004 NCAR Tech Note 2006 4 RRTMG Iacono et al 2008 JGR 2009 New 5 Goddard Chou and Suarez 1999 NASA Tech Memo 2011 7 FLG Gu et al 2011 JGR Fu and Liou 1992 JAS 2012 99 GFDL Fels and Schwarzkopf 1981 JGR 2004 ra sw_ Scheme Cores Chem Microphysics Cloud Ozone physics Interaction Fraction 1 Dudhia ARW NMM Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg 1 0 none Chem PM2 5 2 GSFC ARW Chem t Qc Qi 1 0 5 profiles 3 CAM ARW Qc Qi Qs max rand lat month overlap 4 RRTMG ARW Chem Qc Qr Qi Qs max rand 1 profile or t NMM overlap lat month 5 New ARW Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg 1 0 5 profiles Goddard 7 FLG ARW Qc Qr Qi Qs Qg 1 0 5 profiles 99 GFDL ARW NMM Qc Qr Qi Qs max rand lat date overlap ra_lw_physics Scheme Reference Added 1 RRTM Mlawer et al 1997 JGR 2000 3 CAM Collins et al 2004 NCAR Tech Note 2006 4 RRTMG Iacono et al 2008 JGR 2009 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 9 New
222. nd date ranges must be specified individually in the namelist for each simulation domain Since the work of the metgrid program like that of the ungrib program is time dependent metgrid is run every time a new simulation is initialized Control over how each meteorological field is interpolated is provided by the METGRID TBL file The METGRID TBL file provides one section for each field and within a section it is possible to specify options such as the interpolation methods to be used for the field the field that acts as the mask for masked interpolations and the grid staggering e g U V in ARW H V in NMM to which a field is interpolated Output from metgrid is written in the WRF I O API format and thus by selecting the NetCDF I O format metgrid can be made to write its output in NetCDF for easy visualization using external software packages including the new version of RIP4 Running the WPS Note For software requirements and how to compile the WRF Preprocessing System package see Chapter 2 There are essentially three main steps to running the WRF Preprocessing System 1 Define a model coarse domain and any nested domains with geogrid 2 Extract meteorological fields from GRIB data sets for the simulation period with ungrib 3 Horizontally interpolate meteorological fields to the model domains with metgrid WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 4 When multiple simulations are to be run for the same model domains it is only
223. nd geo_nmm_nest l02 nc 4 Three nests and two level of nesting WPS requires file geo_nmm_nest l01 nc and geo_nmm_nest l02 nc After configuring the file namelist input and placing the appropriate geo_nmm_nest file s in the proper directory s the WRF model can be run identically to the single domain runs described in Running wrf exe WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 47 Using Digital Filter Initialization Digital filter initialization DFI is a new option in V3 2 It is a way to remove initial model imbalance as for example measured by the surface pressure tendency This might be important when interested in the 0 6 hour simulation forecast results It runs a digital filter for a short model integration backward and forward and then starts the forecast In the WRF implementation this is all done in a single job In the current release DFI can only be used in a single domain run No special requirements are needed for data preparation For a typical application the following options are used in the namelist input file dfi_opt 3 dfi_nfilter 7 filter option Dolph dfi_cutoff_seconds 3600 should not be longer than the filter window For time specification it typically needs to integrate backward for 0 5 to 1 hour and integrate forward for half of the time If option dfi_write_filtered_input is set to true a filtered wrfinput file wrfinput_initialized_d01 will be produced If a different time step is u
224. nd yj are as defined for the weighted four point method and 1 lt i j lt 4 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 49 7 nearest_neighbor Nearest neighbor interpolation The nearest neighbor interpolation method simply sets the interpolated value at x y to the value of the nearest source data point regardless of whether this nearest source point is valid missing or masked 8 search Breadth first search interpolation The breadth first search option works by treating the source data array as a 2 d grid graph where each source data point whether valid or not is represented by a vertex Then the value assigned to the point x y is found by beginning a breadth first search at the vertex corresponding to the nearest neighbor of x y and stopping once a vertex representing a valid i e not masked or missing source data point is found In effect this method can be thought of as nearest valid neighbor 9 average_gcell Model grid cell average The grid cell average interpolator may be used when the resolution of the source data is higher than the resolution of the model grid For a model grid cell 7 the method takes a simple average of the values of all source data points that are nearer to the center of I than to the center of any other grid cell The operation of the grid cell average method is illustrated in the figure above where the interpolated value for the model grid cell represented as the large rectangle is give
225. ndex that is found in the data set If this keyword is used category max must also be specified No default value 22 CATEGORY_MAX For categorical data t ype categorical an integer specifying the maximum category index that is found in the data set If this keyword is used category min must also be specified No default value 23 TILE_BDR An integer specifying the halo width in grid points for each tile of data Default value is 0 24 MISSING_VALUE A real value that when encountered in the data set should be interpreted as missing data No default value 25 SCALE_FACTOR A real value that data should be scaled by through multiplication after being read in as integers from tiles of the data set Default value is 1 26 ROW_ORDER A character string either bottom_top Or top bottom specifying whether the rows of the data set arrays were written proceeding from the lowest index row to the highest bot tom_top or from highest to lowest top_bottom This keyword may be useful when utilizing some USGS data sets which are provided in top_bottom order Default value is bottom_top 27 ENDIAN A character string either big or little specifying whether the values in the static data set arrays are in big endian or little endian byte order Default value is big 28 ISWATER An integer specifying the land use category of water Default value is 16 29 ISLAKE An integer specifying the land use category of inland water bod
226. ne may run specific configurations of WRF Only nmm_real is relevant to WRF NMM tools Directory that contains tools var Directory for WRF Var How to Configure the WRF The WRF code has a fairly sophisticated build mechanism The package tries to determine the architecture on which the code is being built and then presents the user with options to allow the user to select the preferred build method For example on a Linux machine the build mechanism determines whether the machine is 32 or 64 bit and then prompts the user for the desired usage of processors such as serial shared memory or distributed memory A helpful guide to building WRF using PGI compilers on a 32 bit or 64 bit LINUX system can be found at http www pgroup com resources tips htm WRF To configure WRF go to the WRF top directory cd WRF and type configure You will be given a list of choices for your computer These choices range from compiling for a single processor job serial to using OpenMP shared memory SM or distributed memory DM parallelization options for multiple processors Choices for a LINUX operating systems include Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with gcc serial Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with gcc smpar Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with gcc dmpar Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with gcc dm sm Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with pgcc SGI MPT serial Linux x86_64 PGI compiler with pgcc SGI MPT smpar
227. ner of the nest in the parent unstaggered grid For the coarsest domain a value of 1 should be specified No default value For WRF NMM nests see note on page 3 15 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 34 5 S_WE A list of MAX_DOM integers which should all be set to 1 Default value is 1 For WRF NMM nests see note on page 3 15 6 E_ WE A list of MAX DOM integers specifying for each nest the nest s full west east dimension For nested domains e_we must be one greater than an integer multiple of the nest s parent_grid_ratio i e ew n parent_grid_ratio tl for some positive integer n No default value For WRF NMM nests see note on page 3 15 7 S_SN A list of MAX_DOM integers which should all be set to 1 Default value is 1 For WRF NMM nests see note on page 3 15 8 E_SN A list of MAX_DOM integers specifying for each nest the nest s full south north dimension For nested domains e_sn must be one greater than an integer multiple of the nest s parent grid_ratio i e e sn n parent_grid_ratiotl for some positive integer n No default value For WRF NMM nests see note on page 3 15 Note For WRF NMM the schematic below illustrates how e_we and e_sn apply on the E grid HVHVHVH V VHVHVHV HVHVHVHV V VHVHVHV H HVHVHVHV V In this schematic H represents mass variables e g temperature pressure moisture and V represents vector wind quantities The H and V at the end of the row are a so called phantom colu
228. nfiguration files arch Registry helper and utility programs tools and packages that are distributed with the WRF code external Scripts The top level directory contains three user executable scripts configure compile and clean The configure script relies on a Perl script in arch Config_new pl WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 1 Programs A significant number of WRF lines of code are automatically generated at compile time The program that does this is tools registry and it is distributed as part of the source code with the WRF model Makefiles The main makefile input to the UNIX make utility is in the top level directory There are also makefiles in most of the subdirectories that come with WRF Make is called recursively over the directory structure Make is not directly invoked by the user to compile WRF the compile script is provided for this purpose The WRF build has been structured to allow parallel make Before the compile command the user sets an environment variable J to the number of processors to use For example to use two processors in csh syntax setenv J j 2 On some machines this parallel make causes troubles a typical symptom is a missing mpif h file in the frame directory The user can force that only a single processor be used with the command setenv J j 1 Configuration files The configure wrf contains compiler linker and other build settings as well as rules and macro def
229. no plots are generated when RIP is run in trajectory calculation mode no rip execution name cgm file is created However two new files are created that are not in a regular non trajectory calculation execution of RIP The first is a file that contains the positions of all the requested trajectories at all the trajectory time steps called rip execution name traj The second is a file that contains requested diagnostic quantities along the trajectories at all data times during the trajectory period called rip execution name diag The diag file is only created if diagnostic fields were requested in the PST b Trajectory plotting Once the trajectories have been calculated they can be plotted in subsequent RIP executions Because the plotting of trajectories is performed with a different execution of RIP than the trajectory calculation the plotting run should have a different rip execution name than any previous trajectory calculation runs Trajectories are plotted by including an appropriate PSL in the PST There are three keywords that are necessary to plot trajectories and several optional keywords The necessary keywords are feld ptyp and tjfl Keyword feld should be set to one of five possibilities arrow ribbon swarm gridswarm or circle these fields are described in detail below Keyword ptyp should be set to either ht for horizontal trajectory plot or vt for vertical cross section trajectory plot And keyword tifl tell
230. non staggered grid Hence GEMPAK is able to decode GRIB files generated by the Unified Post Processing package and plot horizontal fields or vertical cross sections A sample script named run_unipostandgempak which is included in the scripts directory of the tar file can be used to run unipost copygb and plot the following fields using GEMPAK Sfcmap_dnn_hh gif mean SLP and 6 hourly precipitation PrecipType_dnn_hh gif precipitation type just snow and rain 850mbRH_dnn_hh gif 850 mb relative humidity 850mbTempandWind_dnn_hh gif 850 mb temperature and wind vectors 500mbHandVort_dnn_hh gif 500 mb geopotential height and vorticity 250mb WindandH_dnn_hh gif 250 mb wind speed isotacs and geopotential height This script can be modified to customize fields for output GEMPAK has an online users WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 15 guide at http www unidata ucar edu software gempak help_and_documentation manual In order to use the script run_unipostandgempak it is necessary to set the environment variable GEMEXEC to the path of the GEMPAK executables For example setenv GEMEXEC usr local gempak bin Note For GEMPAK the precipitation accumulation period for WRF NMM is given by the variable incrementhr in the run_unipostandgempak script GrADS The GrADS utilities grib2ctl pl and gribmap are able to decode GRIB files whose navigation is on any non staggered grid These utilities and instructions on how to use them to generate Gr
231. nput File UIF Once the RIP data has been created with RIPDP the next step is to prepare the user input file UIF for RIP This file is a text file which tells RIP what plots you want and how they should be plotted A sample UIF called rip_sample in is provided in the RIP tar file A UIF is divided into two main sections The first section specifies various general parameters about the set up of RIP in a namelist format The second section is the plot specification section which is used to specify what plots will be generated a The namelist section The first namelist in the UIF is called amp userin A description of each variable is shown below Each variable has a default value which is the value this variable will take if its specification is omitted from the namelist Additional details for each namelist variable can be found in Chapter 4 of the full RIP User s Guide Variable Name Default Value Description idotitle title 1 auto Control the first part of the first title line titlecolor def foreground Specifies the color for the text in the title linittime 1 If flag 1 the initial date and time in UTC will be printed in the title ifcsttime 1 If flag 1 the forecast lead time in hours will be printed in the title ivalidtime 1 If flag 1 the valid date and time in both UTC and local time will be printed in the title inearesth 0 If flag 1 plot valid time as two di
232. ns are added in Version 3 1 to better represent processes over ice WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 11 sheets and snow covered area 2 This scheme is well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP In V3 6 a sub tiling option is introduced and it is activated by namelist sf_surface_mosaic 1 and the number of tiles in a grid box is defined by namelist mosaic_cat with a default value of 3 c RUC Land Surface Model RUC operational scheme with soil temperature and moisture in six layers multi layer snow and frozen soil physics 3 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM d Pleim Xiu Land Surface Model Two layer scheme with vegetation and sub grid tiling 7 New in Version 3 0 The Pleim Xiu land surface model PX LSM Pleim and Xiu 1995 Xiu and Pleim 2001 was developed and improved over the years to provide realistic ground temperature soil moisture and surface sensible and latent heat fluxes in mesoscale meteorological models The PX LSM is based on the ISBA model Noilhan and Planton 1989 and includes a 2 layer force restore soil temperature and moisture model the top layer is taken to be 1 cm thick and the lower layer is 99cm Grid aggregate vegetation and soil parameters are derived from fractional coverage of land use categories and soil texture types There are two indirect nudging schemes that correct biases in 2 m air temperature and moisture by dynamic adjustment of soil moisture Pleim and Xiu 20
233. nt were taken from the WRF documentation provided by NCAR MMM for the WRF User Community User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 View entire document as a pdf Foreword 1 Overview Introduction The WRF NMM Modeling System Program Components 2 Software Installation Introduction Required Compilers and Scripting Languages o WRF System Software Requirements o WPS Software Requirement Required Optional Libraries to Download UNIX Environment Settings Building the WRF System for the NMM Core o Obtaining and Opening the WRFV3 Package o How to Configure WRF o How to Compile WRF for the NMM Core Building the WRF Preprocessing System o How to Install WPS 3 WRF Preprocessing System WPS Introduction Function of Each WPS Program Running the WPS Creating Nested Domains with the WPS Selecting Between USGS and MODIS based Land Use Data Static Data for the Gravity Wave Drag Scheme Using Multiple Meteorological Data Sources Alternative Initializations of Lake SSTs Parallelism in the WPS Checking WPS Output WPS Utility Programs WRF Domain Wizard Writing Meteorological Data to the Intermediate Format Creating and Editing Vtables Writing Static Data to the Geogrid Binary Format Description of Namelist Variables Description of GEOGRID TBL Options Description of index Options Description of METGRID TBL Options WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3
234. ntries The WRF Registry has the following types of entries not case dependent Dimspec Describes dimensions that are used to define arrays in the model State Describes state variables and arrays in the domain structure II Describes local variables and arrays in solve Typedef Describes derived types that are subtypes of the domain structure Reonfig Describes a configuration e g namelist variable or array Package Describes attributes of a package e g physics Halo Describes halo update interprocessor communications Period Describes communications for periodic boundary updates Xpose Describes communications for parallel matrix transposes include Similar to a CPP include file WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 7 These keywords appear as the first word in a line of the file Registry to define which type of information is being provided Following are examples of the more likely Registry types that users will need to understand Registry Dimspec The first set of entries in the Registry is the specifications of the dimensions for the fields to be defined To keep the WRF system consistent between the dynamical cores and Chemistry a unified registry dimspec file is used located in the Registry directory This single file is included into each Registry file with the keyword include In the example below three dimensions are defined i j and k If you do an ncdump h ona WRF file you will notic
235. nts of a trajectory position file Since it is a binary file the trajectory position file cannot simply be printed out However a short program is provided in the src directory in the RIP tar file called showtraj f which reads the trajectory position file and prints out its contents in a readable form The program should have been compiled when you originally ran make and when you run showtraj it prompts you for the name of the trajectory position file to be printed out d Printing out diagnostics along trajectories As mentioned above if fields are specified in the PST for a trajectory calculation run then RIP produces a diag file that contains values of those fields along the trajectories This file is an unformatted Fortran file so another program is required to view the diagnostics Among the Fortran files included in the src directory in the RIP tar file is tabdiag f which serves this purpose It is compiled when make is run In order to use the program you must first set up a special input file that contains two lines The first line should be the column headings you want to see in the table that will be produced by tabdiag with the entire line enclosed in single quotes The second line is a Fortran I O format string also enclosed in single quotes which determines how the diagnostic values are printed out An example of an input file for tabdiag is included in the RIP tar file called tabdiag in Once the input file is set up tab
236. ny diagnostic quantities that RIP currently calculates The VisSD mode in RIP is switched on by setting imakev5d 1 in the amp userin namelist in the UIF All other variables in the amp userin part of the namelist are ignored No plots are generated in Vis5D mode The desired diagnostic quantities are specified in the PST with only a minimum of information necessary since no plots are produced In most cases only the feld keyword needs to be set and vertical levels should be specified with evs in km for the first field requested The vertical coordinate will automatically be set to z so there is no need to set vcor z The levels specified with levs for the first requested field will apply to all 3D fields requested so the levs specification need not be repeated for every field You are free to choose whatever levels you wish bearing in mind that the data will be interpolated from the data set s vertical levels to the chosen height levels For some fields other keywords that affect the calculation of the field should be set such as strm rfst crag crbg shrd grad gdir qgsm smcp and addf Keywords that only affect how and where the field is plotted can be omitted Any of the diagnostic quantities listed in Appendix B in the full RIP User s Guide can be added to the Vis5D data set with the exception of the Sawyer Eliassen diagnostics Each desired diagnostic quantity should be specified in its own FSG i e only one feld setting be
237. oincident points 0 no feedback In addition to the variables listed above the following variables are used to specify physics options and need to have values for all domains as many columns as domains mp_physics ra_lw_pjysics ra_sw_physics nrads nradl sf_sfclay_physics sf_surface_physics bl_pbl_physics nphs cu_physics nenvc Note It is recommended to run all domains with the same physics the exception being the possibility of running cumulus parameterization in the coarser domain s but excluding it from the finer domain s In case of doubt about whether a given variable accepts values for nested grids search for that variable in the file WRF V3 Registry Registry and check to see if the string max_doms is present in that line Before starting the WRF model make sure to place the nest s time invariant land describing file in the proper directory For example when using WPS place the file geo_nmm_nest l01 nc in the working directory where the model will be run If more than one level of nest will be run place additional files geo_nmm_nest l02 nc geo_nmm_nest l03 nc etc in the working directory Examples 1 One nest and one level of nesting WPS requires file geo_nmm_nest l01 nc Nest 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 46 2 Two nests and one level of nesting WPS requires file geo_nmm_nest l01 nc ent Nest 1 3 Nest 2 3 Two nests and two level of nesting WPS requires file geo_nmm_nest l01 nc a
238. on 3 The WRF NMM is designed to be a flexible state of the art atmospheric simulation system that is portable and efficient on available parallel computing platforms The WRF NMM is suitable for use in a broad range of applications across scales ranging from meters to thousands of kilometers including e Real time NWP e Forecast research e Parameterization research e Coupled model applications e Teaching The NOAA NCEP and the Developmental Testbed Center DTC are currently maintaining and supporting the WRF NMM portion of the overall WRF code Version 3 that includes e WRF Software Framework e WRF Preprocessing System WPS e WRF NMM dynamic solver including one way and two way nesting e Numerous physics packages contributed by WRF partners and the research community e Post processing utilities and scripts for producing images in several graphics programs Other components of the WRF system will be supported for community use in the future depending on interest and available resources WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 1 1 The WRF modeling system software is in the public domain and is freely available for community use The WRF NMM System Program Components Figure 1 shows a flowchart for the WRF NMM System Version 3 As shown in the diagram the WRF NMM System consists of these major components e WRF Preprocessing System WPS e WRF NMM solver e Postprocessor utilities and graphics tools including Unified Post Process
239. one coarse domain and one nest set this variable to 2 e e_we e_sn Number of grid points in the east west and north south direction of the nest In WPS e_sw e_sn for the nest are specified to cover the entire domain of the coarse grid while in file namelist input e_we and e_sn for the nest are specified to cover the domain of the nest e e_vert Number of grid points in the vertical No nesting is done in the vertical therefore the nest must have the same number of levels as its parent e dx dy grid spacing in degrees The nest grid spacing must be 1 3 of its parent e grid_id The domain identifier will be used in the wrfout naming convention The coarser grid must have grid_id 1 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 45 e parent_id Specifies the parent grid of each nest The parents should be identified by their grid_id e i_parent_start j_parent_start Lower left corner starting indices of the nest domain in its parent domain The coarser grid should have parent_id 1 e parent_grid_ratio Integer parent to nest domain grid size ratio Note Must be 3 for the NMM e parent_time_step_ratio Integer parent to nest domain timestep ratio Note Must be 3 for the NMM Since the timestep for the nest is determined using this variable namelist variable time_step only assumes a value for the coarsest grid e feedback If feedback 1 values of prognostic variables in the nest are fedback and overwrite the values in the coarse domain at the c
240. one extra metadata file per data set This metadata file is always named index and thus two data sets cannot reside in the same directory Essentially this metadata file is the first file that geogrid looks for when processing a data set and the contents of the file provide geogrid with all of the information necessary for constructing names of possible data files The contents of an example index file are given below type continuous signed yes projection regular 11 dx 0 00833333 dy 0 00833333 known x 1 0 known_y 1 0 known lat 89 99583 known _ lon 179 99583 wordsize 2 tile_x 1200 tile_y 1200 tile z 1 tile_bdr 3 units meters MSL description Topography height S For a complete listing of keywords that may appear in an index file along with the meaning of each keyword the user is referred to the section on index file options Description of the Namelist Variables A SHARE section This section describes variables that are used by more than one WPS program For example the wrf_core variable specifies whether the WPS is to produce data for the ARW or the NMM core information which is needed by both the geogrid and metgrid programs WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 32 1 WRF_CORE A character string set to either ARWw or nwm that tells the WPS which dynamical core the input data are being prepared for Default value is arw 2 MAX_DOM An integer specifying the total num
241. ons max_dom 0 No longwave radiation 1 RRTM scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 3 CAM scheme 4 RRTMG scheme 5 Goddard scheme 7 FLG UCLA scheme 31 Earth Held Suarez forcing WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 30 Variable Names Value Example Description 99 GFDL scheme Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 98 modified GFDL scheme Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF ra_sw_physics max_dom 99 Short wave radiation options 0 No shortwave radiation 1 Dudhia scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 2 Goddard short wave scheme old 3 CAM scheme 4 RRTMG scheme 5 Goddard scheme 7 FLG UCLA scheme 99 GFDL scheme Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 98 modified GFDL scheme Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF nrads max_dom 100 This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of fundamental time steps between calls to shortwave radiation scheme NCEP s operational setting rads is on the order of 3600 dt For more detailed results use nrads 1800 dt nradl max_dom 100 This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of fundamental time steps between calls to longwave radiation scheme Note that nradl must be set equal to nrads tprec max_dom This flag is only for the WRF NMM core Number of hours of precipitation accumulation in WRF output theat max_
242. ons have not been tested for WRF NMM _ Those options that have been tested are highlighted by indicating whether they have been fully or preliminarily tested for WRF NMM Variable Names Value Description Example amp time_control Time control run_days 2 Run time in days run_hours 0 Run time in hours Note If run time is more than 1 day one may use both run_days and run_hours or just run_hours e g if the total run length is 36 hrs you may set run_days 1 and run_hours 12 or run_days 0 and run_hours 36 run_minutes 00 Run time in minutes WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 24 Variable Names Value Description Example run_seconds 00 Run time in seconds start_year max_dom 2005 Four digit year of starting time start_month max_dom 04 Two digit month of starting time start_day max_dom 27 Two digit day of starting time start_hour max_dom 00 Two digit hour of starting time start_minute max_dom 00 Two digit minute of starting time start_second max_dom 00 Two digit second of starting time end_year max_dom 2005 Four digit year of ending time end_month max_dom 104 Two digit month of ending time end_day max_dom 29 Two digit day of ending time end_hour max_dom 00 Two digit hour of ending time end_minute max_dom 00 Two digit minute of ending time end_second max_dom 00 Two digit second of ending time Note A
243. or 10 INTERP_MASK The name of the field to be used as an interpolation mask along with the value within that field which signals masked points and an optional relational symbol lt or gt A specification takes the form field maskval where field is the name of the field is an optional relational symbol lt or gt and maskval is a real value Source data points will not be used in interpolation if the corresponding point in the field field is equal greater than or less than the value of maskval for no relational symbol a gt symbol or a lt symbol respectively Default value is no mask 11 INTERP_LAND_MASK The name of the field to be used as an interpolation mask when interpolating to water points determined by the static LANDMASK field along with the value within that field which signals land points and an optional relational symbol lt or gt A specification takes the form field maskval where field is the name of the field is an optional relational symbol lt or gt and maskval is a real value Default value is no mask 12 INTERP_WATER_MASK The name of the field to be used as an interpolation mask when interpolating to land points determined by the static LANDMASK field along with the value within that field which signals water points and an optional relational symbol lt or gt A specification takes the form field maskval where field is the name of the field is an optional relational sym
244. or UPP and Read Interpolate Plot RIP e Model Evaluation Tools MET WRF Preprocessing System WPS This program is used for real data simulations Its functions include e Defining the simulation domain e Interpolating terrestrial data such as terrain land use and soil types to the simulation domain e Degribbing and interpolating meteorological data from another model to the simulation domain and the model coordinate For more details see Chapter 3 WRE NMM Solver The key features of the WRF NMM are e Fully compressible non hydrostatic model with a hydrostatic option Janjic 2003a e Hybrid sigma pressure vertical coordinate e Arakawa E grid e Forward backward scheme for horizontally propagating fast waves implicit scheme for vertically propagating sound waves Adams Bashforth Scheme for horizontal advection and Crank Nicholson scheme for vertical advection The same time step is used for all terms e Conservation of a number of first and second order quantities including energy and enstrophy Janjic 1984 e Full physics options for land surface planetary boundary layer atmospheric and surface radiation microphysics and cumulus convection e One way and two way nesting with multiple nests and nest levels For more details and references see Chapter 5 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 1 2 The WRF NMM code contains an initialization program real_nmm exe see Chapter 4 and a numerical integration p
245. ough the i_parent_start and j_parent_start variables and the specified location is given with respect to a mass point on the E grid Finally the dimensions of each nest in grid points are given for each nest using the S_we e_we S_sn and e_sn variables An example is shown in the figure below where it may be seen how each of the above mentioned variables is found Currently the starting grid point values in the south north s_sm and west east s_we directions must be specified as 1 and the ending grid point values e_sm and e_we determine essentially the full dimensions of the nest Note For the WRF NMM the variables i_parent_start j_parent_start s_we e_we s_sn and e_sn are ignored during the WPS processing because the higher resolution static files for each nest level are created for the entire coarse domain These variables however are used when running the WRF NMM model WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 14 Finally for each nest the resolution of source data to interpolate from is specified with the geog_data_res variable For a complete description of these namelist variables the user is referred to the description of namelist variables i 68 j 49 j 17 j_parent_start i 31 i_parent_start Selecting Between USGS and MODIS based Land Use Classifications By default the geogrid program will interpolate land use categories from USGS 24 category data However the user may select an alternative
246. outh_north west_east float FIS Time south_north west_east float RES Time south_north west_east float T Time bottom_top south_north west_east float Q Time bottom_top south_north west_east float U Time bottom_top south_north west_east float V Time bottom_top south_north west_east float DX _NMM Time south_north west_east float ETA1 Time bottom_top_stag float ETA2 Time bottom_top_stag float PDTOP Time float PT Time float PBLH Time south_north west_east float MIXHT Time south_north west_east float USTAR Time south_north west_east float ZO Time south_north west_east float THS Time south_north west_east float QS Time south_north west_east float TWBS Time south_north west_east float QWBS Time south_north west_east float TAUX Time south_north west_east float TAUY Time south_north west_east float PREC Time south_north west_east float APREC Time south_north west_east float ACPREC Time south_north west_east float CUPREC Time south_north west_east float LSPA Time south_north west_east float SNO Time south_north west_east float SI Time south_north west_east float CLDEFI Time south_north west_east float TH10 Time south_north west_east float Q10 Time south_north west_east float PSHLTR Time south_north west_east float TSHLTR Time south_north west_east float QSHLTR Time
247. ow cloud fraction AVE LOW CLOUD FRAC 71 214 Average mid cloud fraction AVE MID CLOUD FRAC 71 224 Average high cloud fraction AVE HIGH CLOUD FRAC 71 234 Average low cloud bottom AVE LOW CLOUD BOTP 1 212 pressure Average low cloud top pressure AVE LOW CLOUD TOPP 1 213 Average low cloud top AVE LOW CLOUD TOPT 11 213 temperature Average mid cloud bottom AVE MID CLOUD BOT P 1 222 pressure Average mid cloud top pressure AVE MID CLOUD TOP P 1 223 Average mid cloud top AVE MID CLOUD TOP T 11 223 temperature Average high cloud bottom AVE HIGH CLOUD BOTP 1 232 pressure Average high cloud top pressure AVE HIGH CLOUD TOPP 1 233 Average high cloud top AVE HIGH CLOUD TOPT 11 233 temperature Total column relative humidity TOT COL REL HUM 52 200 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 27 Cloud work function CLOUD WORK 146 200 FUNCTION Temperature at maximum wind MAX WIND 11 6 level TEMPERATURE Time averaged zonal gravity AVE Z GRAVITY STRESS 147 1 wave stress Time averaged meridional gravity AVE M GRAVITY STRESS 148 1 wave stress Average precipitation type AVE PRECIP TYPE 140 1 Simulated GOES 12 channel 2 GOES TB CH 2 213 8 brightness temperature Simulated GOES 12 channel 3 GOES TB CH 3 214 8 brightness temperature Simulated GOES 12 channel 4 GOES TB CH4 215 8 brightness temperature Simulated GOES 12 channel 5
248. pel on sigma surface GRAUPEL ON S SFCS 179 107 LCL level pressure LIFT PCL LVL PRESS 141 116 LOWEST WET BULB ZERO LOW WET BULB ZERO 7 245 HEIGHT HT Leaf area index LEAF AREA INDEX 182 1 Accumulated land surface model ACM LSM PRECIP 154 1 precipitation In flight icing IN FLIGHT ICING 186 100 Clear air turbulence CLEAR AIR 185 100 TURBULENCE Wind shear between shelter level 0 2000FT LLWS 136 106 and 2000 FT Ceiling CEILING 7 215 Flight restritction FLIGHT RESTRICTION 20 2 Instantaneous clear sky incoming INSTN CLR INC SFC SW 161 1 surface shortwave Pressure level riming factor for F_RimeF ON P SFCS 133 100 Ferrier s scheme Model level vertical volocity W WIND ON MDL SFCS 40 109 Brightness temperature BRIGHTNESS TEMP 213 8 Average albedo AVE ALBEDO 84 1 Ozone on model surface OZONE ON MDL SFCS 154 109 Ozone on pressure surface OZONE ON P SFCS 154 100 Surface zonal momentum flux SFC ZONAL MOMEN FX 124 1 Surface meridional momentum SFC MERID MOMEN FX 125 1 flux Average precipitation rate AVE PRECIP RATE 59 1 Average convective precipitation AVE CONV PRECIP RATE 214 1 rate Instantaneous outgoing longwave INSTN OUT TOA LW RAD 212 8 at top of atmosphere Total spectrum brightness BRIGHTNESS TEMP 118 8 temperature NCAR Model top pressure MODEL TOP PRESSURE 1 8 Composite rain radar reflectivity COMPOSITE RAIN REFL 165 200 Composite ice radar reflectivity COMPOSITE ICE R
249. ple visualization scripts included to create graphics using either GrADS http grads iges org grads grads html or GEMPAK http www unidata ucar edu software gempak index html These are not part of the UPP installation and need to be installed separately if one would like to use either plotting package The Unified Post Processor has been tested on IBM with XLF compiler and LINUX platforms with PGI Intel and GFORTRAN compilers Obtaining the UPP Code The Unified Post Processor package can be downloaded from http www dtcenter org wrf nmm users downloads Note Always obtain the latest version of the code if you are not trying to continue a pre existing project UPPV2 1 is just used as an example here Once the tar file is obtained gunzip and untar the file tar zxvf UPPV2 1 tar gz This command will create a directory called UPPV2 1 UPP Directory Structure Under the main directory of UPPV2 1 reside seven subdirectories indicates directories that are created after the configuration step arch Machine dependent configuration build scripts used to construct configure upp bin Location of executables after compilation scripts contains sample running scripts run_unipost run unipost ndate and copygb run_unipost andgempak run wnipost copygb and GEMPAK to plot various fields run_unipost andgrads run wnipost ndate copygb and GrADS to plot various fields run_unipost _frames run unipost ndate an
250. pography data set is divided into arrays of dimension 1200 x 1200 with each array containing a 10 degree x 10 degree piece of the data set the file whose south west corner is located at 90S 180W is named 00001 01200 00001 01200 and the file whose north east corner is located at 90N 180E is named 42001 43200 20401 21600 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 31 If a data set is to be split into multiple tiles and the number of grid points in say the x direction is not evenly divided by the number of tiles in the x direction then the last column of tiles must be padded with a flag value specified in the index file using the missing_value keyword so that all tiles have the same dimensions For example if a data set has 2456 points in the x direction and three tiles in the x direction will be used the range of x coordinates of the tiles might be 1 820 821 1640 and 1641 2460 with columns 2457 through 2460 being filled with a flag value Clearly since the starting and ending indices must have five digits a field cannot have more than 99999 data points in either of the x or y directions In case a field has more than 99999 data points in either dimension the user can simply split the data set into several smaller data sets which will be identified separately to geogrid For example a very large global data set may be split into data sets for the Eastern and Western hemispheres Besides the binary data files geogrid requires
251. prd To generate the plots above GrADS script cbar gs is invoked This script can also be obtained from the GrADS library of scripts at http grads iges org grads gadoc library html Note For GrADS the precipitation accumulation period for WRF NMM is plotted over the subintervals of the tprec hour set in namelist input Fields produced by unipost Table 3 lists basic and derived fields that are currently produced by unipost The abbreviated names listed in the second column describe how the fields should be entered in the control file wrf_cntrl parm Table 3 Fields produced by unipost column 1 abbreviated names used in the wrf_cntrl parm file column 2 corresponding GRIB identification number for the field column 3 and corresponding GRIB identification number for the vertical coordinate column 4 Field Name Name In Control File a Verncal ID Level Radar reflectivity on model RADAR REFL MDL SFCS 211 109 surface Pressure on model surface PRESS ON MDL SFCS 1 109 Height on model surface HEIGHT ON MDL SFCS 7 109 Temperature on model surface TEMP ON MDL SFCS 11 109 Potential temperature on model POT TEMP ON MDL SFCS 13 109 surface Dew point temperature on model DWPT TEMP ON MDL 17 109 surface SFC Specific humidity on model SPEC HUM ON MDL SFCS 51 109 surface Relative humidity on model REL HUM ON MDL SFCS 52 109 surface Moisture converg
252. pt_output_from_metgrid_path and opt_metgrid_tbl_path allow the user to specify where interpolated data files should be written by metgrid and where the METGRID TBL file may be found As with geogrid and the GEOGRID TBL file a METGRID TBL file appropriate for the WRE core must be linked in the metgrid directory or in the directory specified by opt_metgrid_tb1_path if this variable is set gt ls metgrid METGRID TBL lrwxrwxrwx 1 15 METGRID TBL gt METGRID TBL NMM After suitably editing the namelist wps file and verifying that the correct METGRID TBL will be used metgrid may be run by issuing the command gt metgrid exe If metgrid successfully ran the message Prrrr rrr rrr rrr rrr bbb bbb bt Successful completion of metgrid Prrrr rrr rrr rrr prep b bbb will be printed After successfully running metgrid output files should appear in the WPS root directory or in the directory specified by opt_output_from_metgrid_path if this variable was set These files will be named met_em d0N YYYY MM DD_HH mm ss nc in the case of ARW domains where n is the number of the nest whose data reside in the file or met_nmm d01 YYYY MM DD_HH mm ss nc in the case of NMM domains Here yyyy MM DD_HH mm ss refers to the date of the interpolated data in each file If these files do not exist for each of the times in the range given in the share namelist record the metgrid log file may be consulted to help in determining the proble
253. pt_sfc 1 Surface layer drag coefficient calculation 1 default Monin Obukhov 2 original Noah 3 MYJ consistent 4 YSU consistent opt_btr Soil moisture factor for stomatal resistance 1 Noah 2 CLM 3 SSiB opt_run 1 default TOPMODEL with ground water 2 TOPMODEL with equilibrium water table 3 original surface and subsurface runoff free drainage 4 BATS Biosphere Atmosphere Transfer Scheme surface and subsurface runoff free drainage opt_frz Supercooled liquid water option 1 default no iteration 2 Koren s iteration opt_inf Soil permeability option 1 default linear effect more permeable 2 non linear effect less permeable opt_rad Radiative transfer option 1 modified two stream 2 two stream applied to grid cell 3 default two stream applied to vegetated fraction opt_alb Ground surface albedo option 1 BATS 2 default CLASS Canadian Land Surface Scheme opt_snf Precipitation partitioning between snow and rain 1 default Jordan 1991 2 BATS snow when SFCTMP lt TFRZ 2 2 3 show when SEFCTMP lt TFRZ opt_tbot Soil temp lower boundary condition 1 zero heat flux 2 default TBOT at 8m from input file opt_stc Snow soil temperature time scheme 1 default semi implicit WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 38 Variable Names Value Description Example 2 fully implicit amp fdda
254. r 2 d array then written row by row to a binary file However because a continuous field may contain non integral or negative values the storage representation of each element within the file is slightly more complex All elements in the array must first be converted to integral values This is done by first scaling all elements by a constant chosen to maintain the required precision and then removing any remaining fractional part through rounding For example if three decimal places of precision are required the value 2 71828 would need to be divided by 0 001 and rounded to 2718 Following conversion of all array elements to integral values if any negative values are found in the array a second conversion must be applied if elements are stored using 1 byte each then 2 is added to each negative element for storage using 2 bytes 2 is added to each negative element for storage using 3 bytes 2 is added to each negative element and for storage using 4 bytes a value of 2 is added to each negative element It is important to note that no conversion is applied to positive elements Finally the resulting positive integral array is written as in the case of a dominant category field Multi level continuous fields are handled much the same as single level continuous fields For an n x m x r array conversion to a positive integral field is first performed as described above Then each n x m sub array is written contiguously to the
255. r example the first output file for a run started at 0000 UTC 23 January 2005 would be wrfout_d01_2005 01 23_00 00 00 If multiple grids were used in the simulation additional output files named wrfout_d02_yyyy mm dd_hh mm ss wrfout_d03_yyyy mm dd_hh mm ss cca will be produced To check whether the run is successful look for SUCCESS COMPLETE WRF at the end of the log file e g rsl out 0000 wrf out The times written to an output file can be checked by typing ncdump v Times wrfout_d01_2005 01 23_00 00 00 The number of wrfout files generated by a successful run of wrf exe and the number of output times per wrfout file will depend on the output options specified in namelist input i e frames_per_outfile and history interval Restart Run A restart run allows a user to extend a run to a longer simulation period It is effectively a continuous run made of several shorter runs Hence the results at the end of one or more restart runs should be identical to a single run without any restart In order to do a restart run one must first create a restart file This is done by setting namelist variable restart_interval unit is in minutes to be equal to or less than the simulation length in the first model run as specified by run_ variables or start_ and end_ times When the model reaches the time to write a restart file a restart file named wrfrst_d lt domain gt _ lt date gt will be written The date string represents
256. rared radiation parameterization for use in general circulation models NASA Tech Memo 104606 3 85pp Dudhia J 1989 Numerical study of convection observed during the winter monsoon experiment using a mesoscale two dimensional model J Atmos Sci 46 3077 3107 Ek M B K E Mitchell Y Lin E Rogers P Grunmann V Koren G Gayno and J D Tarpley 2003 Implementation of NOAH land surface model advances in the NCEP operational mesoscale Eta model J Geophys Res 108 No D22 8851 do1 10 1029 2002JD003296 Fels S B and M D Schwarzkopf 1975 The simplified exchange approximation A new method for radiative transfer calculations J Atmos Sci 32 1475 1488 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 55 Ferrier B S Y Lin T Black E Rogers and G DiMego 2002 Implementation of a new grid scale cloud and precipitation scheme in the NCEP Eta model Preprints 15th Conference on Numerical Weather Prediction San Antonio TX Amer Meteor Soc 280 283 Gopalakrishnan S G N Surgi R Tuleya and Z Janjic 2006 NCEP s Two way Interactive Moving Nest NMM WRF modeling system for Hurricane Forecasting 27 Conf On Hurric Trop Meteor Available online at http ams confex com ams 27Hurricanes techprogram paper_107899 htm Grell G A 1993 Prognostic Evaluation of Assumptions Used by Cumulus Parameterizations Mon Wea Rev 121 764 787 Grell G A and D Devenyi 2002 A generalized approach to parameteri
257. re must be n separate table entries for the field each of which must be given a unique value for priority in the range 1 n No default value 3 DEST_TYPE A character string either categorical or continuous that tells whether the interpolated field from the data source given in the table section is to be treated as a continuous or a categorical field No default value 4 INTERP_OPTION A sequence of one or more character strings which are the names of interpolation methods to be used when horizontally interpolating the field Available WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 39 interpolation methods are average 4pt average 16pt wt average 4pt wt_average_ lopt nearest neighbor four _pt sixteen pt search average _gcell r for the grid cell average method average_gcel1 the optional argument r specifies the minimum ratio of source data resolution to simulation grid resolution at which the method will be applied if a ratio is not specified r 0 0 and the option is used for any ratio When a sequence of two or more methods are given the methods should be separated by a sign No default value 5 SMOOTH_OPTION A character string giving the name of a smoothing method to be applied to the field after interpolation Available smoothing options are 1 2 1 smth desmth and smth desmth_special ARW only Default value is null i e no smoothing is applied 6 SMOOTH_PASSES If smoothing is to be performed on the interpolated fi
258. rogram wrf exe see Chapter 5 Unified Post Processor UPP This program can be used to post process both WRF ARW and WRF NMM forecasts and was designed to e Interpolate the forecasts from the model s native vertical coordinate to NWS standard output levels e Destagger the forecasts from the staggered native grid to a regular non staggered grid e Compute diagnostic output quantities e Output the results in NWS and WMO standard GRIB1 For more details see Chapter 7 Read Interpolate Plot RIP This program can be used to plot both WRF ARW and WRF NMM forecasts Some basic features include e Uses a preprocessing program to read model output and convert this data into standard RIP format data files e Makes horizontal plots vertical cross sections and skew T log p soundings e Calculates and plots backward and forward trajectories e Makes a data set for use in the Vis5D software package For more details see Chapter 7 Model Evaluation Tools MET This verification package can be used to evaluate both WRF ARW and WRF NMM forecasts with the following techniques e Standard verification scores comparing gridded model data to point based observations e Standard verification scores comparing gridded model data to gridded observations e Object based verification method comparing gridded model data to gridded observations MET is developed and supported by the Developmental Testbed Center and full details
259. ry one way Gopalakrishnan et al 2006 and two way nesting By setting the feedback switch in the namelist input file to 0 or 1 the domains behave as one way or two way nests respectively The model can handle multiple domains at the same nest level no overlapping nest and or multiple nest levels telescoping Make sure that you compile the code with nest options turned on as described in Chapter 2 The nest s can be located anywhere inside the parent domain as long as they are at least 5 parent grid points away from the boundaries of the parent grid Similar to the coarsest domain nests use an E staggered grid with a rotated latitude longitude projection The horizontal grid spacing ratio between the parent and the nest is 1 3 and every third point of the nest coincides with a point in the parent domain The time step used in the nest must be 1 3 that of the parent time step No nesting is applied in the vertical that is the nest has the same number of vertical levels as its parent Note that while the hybrid levels of the nest and parent in sigma space coincide the nest and the parent do not have the same levels in pressure or height space This is due to the differing topography and consequently different surface pressure between the nest and the parent Nests can be introduced in the beginning of the model forecast or later into the run Similarly nests can run until the end of the forecast or can be turned off earlier in the run
260. s and array transposes for FFTs to be run in the X Y or Z directions The Registry associates various fields with particular physics packages so that the memory footprint reflects the actual selection of the options not a maximal value Together these capabilities allow a large portion of the WRF code to be automatically generated Any code that is automatically generated relieves the developer of the effort of coding and debugging that portion of software Usually the pieces of code that are suitable candidates for automation are precisely those that are fraught with hard to detect errors such as communications indexing and IO which must be replicated for hundreds of variables Registry Syntax Each entry in the Registry is for a specific variable whether it is for a new dimension in the model a new field a new namelist value or even anew communication For readability a single entry may be spread across several lines with the traditional at the end of a line to denote that the entry is continuing When adding to the Registry most users find that it is helpful to copy an entry that is similar to the anticipated new entry and then modify that Registry entry The Registry is not sensitive to spatial formatting White space separates identifiers in each entry Note Do not simply remove an identifier and leave a supposed token blank use the appropriate default value currently a dash character Registry E
261. s RIP which trajectory position file you want to access for the trajectory plot As mentioned above there are four different representations of trajectories as specified by the feld keyword e feld arrow This representation shows trajectories as curved arrows with arrowheads drawn along each trajectory at a specified time interval If the plot is a horizontal trajectory plot ptyp ht the width of each arrowhead is proportional to the height of the trajectory at that time If the plot is a vertical cross section trajectory plot ptyp vt the width of each arrowhead is constant The arrowhead that corresponds to the time of the plot is boldened e feld ribbon This representation shows trajectories as curved ribbons with arrowheads drawn along each trajectory at a specified time interval If the plot is a horizontal trajectory plot ptyp ht the width of each arrowhead and the width of the ribbon is proportional to the height of the trajectory at that time If the plot is a vertical cross section trajectory plot ptyp vt the width of each arrowhead and the ribbon is constant The arrowhead that corresponds to the time of the plot is boldened e feld swarm This representation shows a group of trajectories attached to each other by straight lines at specified times The trajectories are connected to each other in the same order at each time they are plotted so that the time evolution of a material curve can be depicted Swarms can be
262. s for WRF NMM Hurricane WRF HWRF WRF ARW and GFS For CRTM documentation refer to http www orbit nesdis noaa gov smcd spb CRTM The adaptation of the original WRF Post Processor package and User s Guide by Mike Baldwin of NSSL CIMMS and Hui Ya Chuang of NCEP EMC was done by Ligia Bernardet NOAA ESRL DTC in collaboration with Dusan Jovic NCEP EMC Robert Rozumalski COMET Wesley Ebisuzaki NWS HQTR and Louisa Nance NCAR RAL DTC Upgrades to WRF Post Processor versions 2 2 and higher were performed by Hui Ya Chuang Dusan Jovic and Mathew Pyle NCEP EMC Transitioning of the documentation from the WRF Post Processor to the Unified Post Processor was performed by Nicole McKee NCEP EMC Hui ya Chuang NCEP EMC and Jamie Wolff NCAR RAL DTC Implementation of the Community Unified Post Processor was performed by Tricia Slovacek NCAR RAL DTC UPP Software Requirements The Community Unified Post Processor requires the same Fortran and C compilers used to build the WRF model In addition the netCDF library the JasPer library the PNG library Zlib and the WRF I O API libraries which are included in the WRF model tar file are also required The JasPer library PNG library and Zlib are new requirements with the release of UPPv2 0 due to the addition GRIB2 capabilities NCEP provides these necessary codes for download http www nco ncep noaa gov pmb codes GRIB2 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 2 The UPP has some sam
263. s may need to increase the number of vertical levels e The common availability of a valid seaice field in the input provided from the metgrid program has made obsolete the option to autoconvert cold enough water points to seaice By default the temperature at which water converts to seaice is now 100 K a temperature cold enough that the option will never be triggered WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 4 5 User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 5 WRF NMM Model Table of Contents e Introduction e WRE NMM Dynamics o Time stepping o Advection o Diffusion o Divergence damping e Physics Options o Microphysics Longwave Radiation Shortwave Radiation Surface Layer Land Surface Planetary Boundary Layer o Cumulus Parameterization Other Physics Options Other Dynamics Options Operational Configuration Description of Namelist Variables How to Run WRF for the NMM core Restart Run Configuring a Run with Multiple Domains Using Digital Filter Initialization Using sst_update Option Using IO quilting Real Data Test Case List of Fields in WRF NMM Output Extended Reference List for WRF NMM Core O O O 0 O Introduction The WRF NMM is a fully compressible non hydrostatic mesoscale model with a hydrostatic option Janjic et al 2001 Janjic 2003a b The model uses a terrain following hybrid sigma pressure vertical coordina
264. s must be given a list of N values one for each nest The only other change to the share namelist record is to the starting and ending times Here a starting and ending time must be given for each nest with the restriction that a nest cannot begin before its parent domain or end after its parent domain also it is suggested that nests be given starting and ending times that are identical to the desired starting times of the nest when running WPS This is because the nests get their lateral boundary conditions from their parent domain and thus only the initial time for a nest needs to be processed by WPS It is important to note that when running WRF the actual starting and ending times for all nests must be given in the WRF namelist input file The remaining changes are to the geogrid namelist record In this record the parent of each nest must be specified with the parent_id variable Every nest must be a child of exactly one other nest with the coarse domain being its own parent Related to the identity of a nest s parent is the nest refinement ratio with respect to a nest s parent which is given by the parent_grid_ratio variable this ratio determines the nominal grid spacing for a nest in relation to the grid spacing of the its parent Note This ratio must always be set to 3 for the WRF NMM Next the lower left corner of a nest is specified as an i J location in the nest s parent domain this specification is done thr
265. scribed above can be tested on the real data set provided The test data set is accessible from the WRF NMM download page Under WRF Model Test Data select the January data This is a 55x91 15 km domain centered over the eastern US e After running the real_nmm exe program the files wrfinput_d01 and wrfbdy_d01 should appear in the working directory These files will be used by the WRF model e The wrf exe program is executed next This step should take a few minutes only a 24 h forecast is requested in the namelist e The output file wrfout_d01 2005 01 23_00 00 00 should contain a 24 h forecast at 1 h intervals List of Fields in WRF NMM Output The following is edited output from the netCDF command ncdump ncedump h wrfout_d01_yyyy_mm_dd hh mm ss An example netcdf wrfout_d01_2008 01 11_00 00 00 dimensions Time UNLIMITED 1 currently DateStrLen 19 west_east 19 south_north 39 bottom_top 27 bottom_top_stag 28 soil_layers_stag 4 variables char Times Time DateStrLen WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 49 float TOY VAR Time bottom_top south_north west_east float LU_INDEX Time south_north west_east float HBM2 Time south_north west_east float HBM3 Time south_north west_east float VBM2 Time south_north west_east float VBM3 Time south_north west_east float SM Time south_north west_east float SICE Time south_north west_east float PD Time s
266. sea level pressure surface pressure surface u and v surface temperature surface relative humidity input elevation WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 4 2 e 2 D meteorological optional data from WPS sea surface temperature physical snow depth water equivalent snow depth e 2D static data for the physical surface terrain elevation land use categories soil texture categories temporally interpolated monthly data land sea mask elevation of the input model s topography e 2D static data for the projection map factors Coriolis projection rotation computational latitude e constants domain size grid distances date e The WPS data may either be isobaric or some more generalized vertical coordinate where each column is monotonic in pressure e All 3 D meteorological data wind temperature height moisture pressure must have the same number of levels and variables must have the exact same levels For example it is not acceptable to have more levels for temperature for example than height Likewise it is not acceptable to have an extra level for the horizontal wind components but not for moisture Running real_nmm exe The procedure outlined below is used for single or multiple nested grid runs 1 Change to the working directory of choice cd test amm_real or cd run 2 Make sure the files listed below reside in or are linked to the working directory chosen to run the model under WRF V3 run unless otherwise noted CAM_ABS_
267. sed for DFI one may use time_step_dfi to set it Using sst_update option The WRF model physics does not predict sea surface temperature vegetation fraction albedo and sea ice For long simulations the model provides an alternative to read in the time varying data and update these fields In order to use this option one must have access to time varying SST and sea ice fields Twelve monthly values vegetation fraction and albedo are available from the geogrid program Once these fields are processed via WPS one may activate the following options in namelist record amp time_control before running program real_nmm exe and wrf exe sst_update I1 in amp physics io_form_auxinput4 2 auxinput4_inname wrflowinp_d lt domain gt created by real_nmm exe auxinput4_interval 720 Using IO Quilting WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 48 This option allows a few processors to be set alone to do output only It can be useful and performance friendly if the domain sizes are large and or the time taken to write a output time is getting significant when compared to the time taken to integrate the model in between the output times There are two variables for setting the option nio_tasks_per_group How many processors to use per IO group for IO quilting Typically 1 or 2 processors should be sufficient for this purpose nio_groups How many IO groups for IO Default is 1 Real Data Test Case 2005 January 23 00 through 24 00 The steps de
268. sed in the calculation of the variable critical Richardson number Ric in GFS PBL scheme Default coef_ric_l 0 16 coef_ric_s Placeholder for the coefficient used in the calculation of the variable critical Richardson number Ric in GFS PBL scheme Default coef_ric_s 0 25 sf_ocean_physics renamed from omicall in previous versions Simple ocean mixed layer model 1 1 D ocean mixed layer model following that of Pollard Rhines and Thompson 1972 Two other namelist options are available to specify the initial mixed layer depth although one may ingest real mixed layer depth data oml_hmlO and a temperature lapse rate below the mixed layer oml_gamma Since V3 2 this option works with all sf_surface_physics options sf_ocean_physics 2 New in V3 5 3D Price Weller Pinkel PWP ocean model based on Price et al 1994 This model predicts horizontal advection pressure gradient force as well as mixed layer processes Only simple initialization via namelist variables ocean_z ocean_t and ocean_s is available in V3 5 isftcflx Modify surface bulk drag Donelan and enthalpy coefficients to be more in line with recent research results of those for tropical storms and hurricanes This option also includes dissipative heating term in heat flux It is only available for sf_sfclay_physics 1 There are two options for computing enthalpy coefficients isftcflx 1 constant Zog since V3 2 for heat and moisture isftcflx 2 Garratt
269. should be used and for the NMM the GEOGRID TBL NMM file should be used Selection of the appropriate GEOGRID TBL is accomplished by linking the correct file to GEOGRID TBL in the geogrid directory or in the directory specified by opt _geogrid_tb1_ path if this variable is set in the namelist gt ls geogrid GEOGRID TBL lrwxrwxrwx 1 15 GEOGRID TBL gt GEOGRID TBL NMM For more details on the meaning and possible values for each variable the user is referred to a description of the namelist variables WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 6 Having suitably defined the simulation coarse domain and nested domains in the namelist wps file the geogrid exe executable may be run to produce domain files In the case of ARW domains the domain files are named geo_em d0N nc where n is the number of the nest defined in each file When run for NMM domains geogrid produces the file geo_nmm d01 nc for the coarse domain and geo_nmm_nest 10N nc files for each nesting level n Also note that the file suffix will vary depending on the io form _geogrid that is selected To run geogrid issue the following command gt geogrid exe When geogrid exe has finished running the message rrr rr rr rrr rrr rr rr bbb bbe Successful completion of geogrid Prrrrrr rrr rrr rrr bbb bbb should be printed and a listing of the WPS root directory or the directory specified by opt output from _geogrid_path if this variable was set should show the
270. sic features of the program are outlined below e Uses a preprocessing program called RIPDP which reads model output and converts this data into standard RIP format data files that can be ingested by RIP e Makes Lambert Conformal Polar Stereographic Mercator or stretched rotated cyllindrical equidistant SRCE map backgrounds with any standard parallels e Makes horizontal plots of contours color filled contours vectors streamlines or characters e Makes horizontal plots on model vertical levels as well as on pressure height potential temperature equivalent potential temperature or potential vorticity surfaces e Makes vertical cross sections of contours color filled contours full vectors or horizontal wind vectors e Makes vertical cross sections using vertical level index pressure log pressure Exner function height potential temperature equivalent potential temperature or potential vorticity as the vertical coordinate e Makes skew 7 log p soundings at points specified as grid coordinates lat lon coordinates or station locations with options to plot a hodograph or print sounding derived quantities e Calculates backward or forward trajectories including hydrometeor trajectories and calculates diagnostic quantities along trajectories e Plots trajectories in plan view or vertical cross sections e Makes a data set for use in the Vis5D visualization software package e Allows for complete user control over the
271. south_north west_east float Q2 Time bottom_top south_north west_east float AKHS_OUT Time south_north west_east float AKMS_OUT Time south_north west_east WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 50 float ALBASE Time south_north west_east float ALBEDO Time south_north west_east float CNVBOT Time south_north west_east float CNVTOP Time south_north west_east float CZEN Time south_north west_east float CZMEAN Time south_north west_east float EPSR Time south_north west_east float GLAT Time south_north west_east float GLON Time south_north west_east float MXSNAL Time south_north west_east float RADOT Time south_north west_east float SIGT4 Time south_north west_east float TGROUND Time south_north west_east float CWM Time bottom_top south_north west_east float RRW Time bottom_top south_north west_east float F_ICE Time bottom_top south_north west_east float F_RAIN Time bottom_top south_north west_east float F_RIMEF Time bottom_top south_north west_east float CLDFRA Time bottom_top south_north west_east float SR Time south_north west_east float CFRACH Time south_north west_east float CFRACL Time south_north west_east float CFRACM Time south_north west_east int ISLOPE Time south_north west_east float DZSOIL Time bottom_top float SLDPTH Time bottom_top float CMC Time south_north west_east
272. spacing specified in kilometers for other grids can be approximated by considering the following schematic V DX H DY dx DY H DX V The horizontal grid resolution is taken to be the shortest distance between two mass H points diagonal dx while DX and DY refer to distances between adjacent H and V points The distance between the H points in the diagram above is the hypotenuse of the triangle with legs DX and DY Assuming 111 km degree a reasonable assumption for the rotated latitude longitude grid the grid spacing in km is approximately equal to 111 0 SQRT DX 2 DY 2 12 MAP_PROJ A character string specifying the projection of the simulation domain For ARW accepted projections are lambert polar mercator and lat lon for NMM a projection of rotated_11 must be specified Default value is lambert 13 REF_LAT A real value specifying the latitude part of a latitude longitude location whose i j location in the simulation domain is known For ARW ref_lat gives the WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 36 latitude of the center point of the coarse domain by default 1 e when ref_x and ref_y are not specified For NMM ref_lat always gives the latitude to which the origin is rotated No default value 14 REF_LON A real value specifying the longitude part of a latitude longitude location whose i j location in the simulation domain is known For ARW ref_lon gives the longitude of
273. surface layer 10 TEMF 11 Revised MMS surface layer scheme 88 GFDL surface layer scheme Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF izOtInd Thermal roughness length for sfclay and myjsfc 0 old 1 veg dependent Czil sf_surface_physics max_dom 99 Land surface options 0 No surface temperature prediction 1 Thermal diffusion scheme 2 Noah Land Surface Model Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 3 RUC Land Surface Model Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 4 Noah MP land surface model additional options under amp noah_mp preliminarily tested for WRF NMM WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 32 Variable Names Value Example Description 5 CLM4 Community Land Model Version 4 7 Pleim Xiu Land Surface Model ARW only 8 SSiB land surface model ARW only Works with ra_lw_physics 1 3 4 and ra_sw_physics 1 3 4 88 GFDL slab land surface model Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF bl_pbl_physics max_dom Boundary layer options 0 No boundary layer 1 YSU scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM 2 Mellor Yamada Janjic TKE scheme Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 3 NCEP Global Forecast System scheme Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF 4 QNSE 5 MYNN 2 5 level TKE works with sf_sfclay_physics 1 2 and 5 6 MYNN 3 level TKE works with sf_sfclay_physics 5 only 7 ACM2
274. t icloud Cloud effect to the optical depth in the Dudhia shortwave ra_sw_physics 1 and RRTM longwave radiation ra_lw_physics 1 schemes 0 No cloud effect 1 With cloud effect swrad_scat Scattering tuning parameter default 1 is 1 e 5 m kg only for ra_sw_physics 1 num_soil_layers Number of soil layers in land surface model Options available 2 Pleim Xu Land Surface Model 4 Noah Land Surface Model Well tested for WRF NMM used operationally at NCEP 5 Thermal diffusion scheme 6 RUC Land Surface Model Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM maxiens Grell Devenyi and G3 only Note The following 5 are recommended numbers If you would like to use any other number consult the code and know what you are doing maxens G D only maxens2 G D only maxens3 16 G D only ensdim 144 G D only mp_zero_out For non zero mp_physics options to keep water vapor positive Qv gt 0 and to set the other WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 35 Variable Names Value Example Description moisture fields smaller than some threshold value to zero 0 No action is taken no adjustment to any moist field conservation maintained 1 All moist arrays except for Qv are set to zero if they fall below a critical value No conservation 2 Qv lt 0 are set to zero and all other moist arrays that fall below the critical value defined in
275. t and maintenance of large applications such as WRF Just for the WRF model hundreds of thousands of lines of WRF code are automatically generated from a user edited table called the Registry The Registry provides a high level single point of control over the fundamental structure of the model data and thus provides considerable utility for developers and maintainers It contains lists describing state data fields and their attributes dimensionality binding to particular solvers association with WRF I O streams communication operations and run time configuration options namelist elements and their bindings to model control structures Adding or modifying a state variable to WRF involves modifying a single line of a single file this single change is then automatically propagated to scores of locations in the source code the next time the code is compiled The WRF Registry has two components the Registry file which the user may edit and the Registry program The Registry file is located in the Registry directory and contains the entries that direct the auto generation of WRF code by the Registry program There is more than one Registry in this directory with filenames such as Registry EM for builds using the Eulerian Mass ARW core and Registry NMM _NEST for builds using the NUM core The WRF Build Mechanism copies one of these to the file Registry Registry and this file is used to direct the Registry program The syntax and semantics
276. t heat fluxes using a formulation based on Miyakoda and Sirutis 1986 modified for very stable and unstable situations Land surface evaporation has three components direct evaporation from the soil and canopy and transpiration from vegetation following the formulation of Pan and Mahrt 1987 3 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM d Pleim Xiu surface layer 7 New in Version 3 0 e QNSE surface layer Quasi Normal Scale Elimination PBL scheme s surface layer option 4 New in Version 3 1 f MYNN surface layer Nakanishi and Niino PBL s surface layer scheme 5 g TEMF surface layer Total Energy Mass Flux surface layer scheme New in Version 3 3 h Revised MM5 surface layer scheme 11 Remove limits and use updated stability functions New in Version 3 4 Jimenez et al MWR 2012 i GFDL surface layer 88 This scheme is well tested and used operationally at NCEP for HWRF h izOtlnd 1 for sf_sfclay_physics 1 or 2 Chen Zhang thermal roughness length over land which depends on vegetation height 0 original thermal roughness length in each sfclay option New in Version 3 2 Land Surface sf_surface_physics a 5 layer thermal diffusion Soil temperature only scheme using five layers sf_surface_physics 1 b Noah Land Surface Model Unified NCEP NCAR AFWA scheme with soil temperature and moisture in four layers fractional snow cover and frozen soil physics New modificatio
277. t higher for nesting IO or history and restart IO amp dfi_control Digital filter option control dfi_opt 0 DFI option 0 No digital filter initialization 1 Digital Filter Launch DFL 2 Diabatic DFI DDFD 3 Twice DFI TDFI Recommended dfi_nfilter 7 Digital filter type 0 uniform 1 Lanczos 2 Hamming 3 Blackman 4 Kaiser 5 Potter 6 Dolph window 7 Dolph recommended 8 recursive high order dfi_write_filtered_input true Whether to write wrfinput file with filtered model state before beginning forecast dfi_write_dfi_history false Whether to write wrfout files during filtering integration dfi_cutoff_seconds 3600 Cutoff period in seconds for filter Should not be longer than the filter window dfi_time_dim 1000 Maximum number of time steps for filtering period this value can be larger than necessary dfi_bckstop_year 2005 Four digit year of stop time for backward DFI integration For a model that starts from 2005042700 this example specifies 1 hour backward integration dfi_bckstop_month 04 Two digit month of stop time for backward DFI integration dfi_bckstop_day 26 Two digit day of stop time for backward DFI WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 40 Variable Names Value Example Description integration dfi_bckstop_hour 23 Two digit hour of stop time for backward DFI integration dfi_bckstop_minute 00 Two digit minute of stop time for backward DFI integration dfi_bckstop_seco
278. t working directory should reveal symbolic links to executables for each of the three WPS programs geogrid exe ungrib exe and metgrid exe if the WPS software was successfully installed If any of these links do not exist check the compilation output in compile_wps output to see what went wrong In addition to these three links a namelist wps file should exist Thus a listing of the WPS root directory should include arch metgrid exe gt metgrid src metgrid exe clean namelist wps compile namelist wps all_options WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 2 10 compile_wps out configure configure wps geogrid geogrid exe gt geogrid src geogrid exe link_grib csh metgrid namelist wps fire namelist wps global namelist wps nmm README ungrib ungrib exe gt ungrib src ungrib exe util More details on the functions of the WPS and how to run it can be found in Chapter 3 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide User s Guide for the NMM Core of the Weather Research and Forecast WRF Modeling System Version 3 Chapter 3 WRF Preprocessing System WPS Table of Contents Introduction Function of Each WPS Program Running the WPS Creating Nested Domains with the WPS Selecting Between USGS and MODIS based Land Use Data Static Data for the Gravity Wave Drag Scheme Using Multiple Meteorological Data Sources Alternative Initialization of Lake SSTs Parallelism in the WPS Checking WPS Output WPS Utility Programs WRE Domain Wizard
279. t_east float QSFC Time south_north west_east float HTOP Time south_north west_east float HBOT Time south_north west_east float HTOPD Time south_north west_east float HBOTD Time south_north west_east float HTOPS Time south_north west_east float HBOTS Time south_north west_east float CUPPT Time south_north west_east float CPRATE Time south_north west_east float SNOWH Time south_north west_east WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 53 float SMFR3D Time soil_layers_stag south_north west_east int ITIMESTEP Time float XTIME Time global attributes TITLE OUTPUT FROM WRF V3 1 MODEL SSTART_DATE 2008 01 11 00 00 00 SSIMULATION_START_DATE 2008 01 11_00 00 00 WEST EAST_GRID_DIMENSION 20 SOUTH NORTH_GRID_DIMENSION 40 BOTTOM TOP_GRID_DIMENSION 28 GRIDTYPE E DIFF_OPT 1 KM_OPT 1 DAMP_OPT 1 KHDIF 0 f KVDIF 0 f MP_PHYSICS 5 RA_LW_PHYSICS 99 RA_SW_PHYSICS 99 SF_SFCLAY_PHYSICS 2 SF_SURFACE_ PHYSICS 2 BL_PBL_PHYSICS 2 CU_PHYSICS 2 SURFACE_INPUT_SOURCE 1 SST_UPDATE 0 SF_URBAN_PHYSICS 0 FEEDBACK 0 SMOOTH_OPTION 2 SWRAD SCAT Lf gt W_DAMPING 0 WEST EAST_PATCH_START_UNSTAG 1 WEST EAST_PATCH_END_UNSTAG 19 WEST EAST_PATCH_START_STAG 1 WEST EAST_PATCH_END_STAG 20 SOUTH NORTH_PATCH_START_UNSTAG 1 SOUTH NORTH_PATCH_END_UNSTAG 39
280. te The grid staggering is the Arakawa E grid The same time step is used for all terms The dynamics conserve a number of first and second order quantities including energy and enstrophy Janjic 1984 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 1 The WRF NMM code contains an initialization program real_nmm exe see Chapter 4 and a numerical integration program wrfiexe The WRF NMM model Version 3 supports a variety of capabilities These include e Real data simulations Non hydrostatic and hydrostatic runtime option Full physics options One way and two way nesting Applications ranging from meters to thousands of kilometers Digital filter initialization WRF NMM Dynamics in a Nutshell Time stepping Horizontally propagating fast waves Forward backward scheme Vertically propagating sound waves Implicit scheme Horizontal Adams Bashforth scheme Vertical Crank Nicholson scheme TKE water species Explicit iterative flux corrected called every two time steps Advection space for T U V Horizontal Energy and enstrophy conserving quadratic conservative second order Vertical Quadratic conservative second order TKE Water species Upstream flux corrected positive definite conservative Diffusion Diffusion in the WRF NMM is categorized as lateral diffusion and vertical diffusion The vertical diffusion in the PBL and in the free atmosphere is handled by the surface layer scheme and by the boundary layer parameterization scheme
281. th the WPS At this time the WRF NMM supports one way and two way stationary and moving if running an HWRF configuration see HWRF User s Guide nests Because the WRF NMM nesting strategy was targeted towards the the capability of moving nests time invariant information such as topography soil type albedo etc for a nest must be acquired over the entire domain of the coarsest grid even though for a stationary nest that information will only be used over the location where the nest is initialized Running the WPS for WRF NMM nested domain simulations is essentially no more difficult than running for a single domain case the geogrid program simply processes more than one grid when it is run rather than a single grid The number of grids is unlimited Grids may be located side by side i e two nests may be children of the same parent and located on the same nest level or telescopically nested The nesting ratio for the WRF NMM is always 3 Hence the grid spacing of a nest is always 1 3 of its parent The nest level is dependant on the parent domain If one nest is defined inside the coarsest domain the nest level will be one and one additional static file will be created If two nests are defined to have the same parent again only one additional static file will be created For example Grid 1 parent Nest 1 OR WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 12 Grid 1 parent Nest 1 Nest 2 will create an output file for
282. the program will halt as soon as this can be determined Similarly any intermediate files for dates that cannot be used as part of a complete 24 hour period are ignored for example if there are five intermediate files available at a six hour interval the last file would be ignored The computed average field is written to a new file named TAVGSFC using the same intermediate format version as the input files This daily mean surface temperature field can then be ingested by metgrid by specifying TAVGSFC for the constants_name variable in the metgrid namelist section B mod_levs exe The mod_levs exe program is used to remove levels of data from intermediate format files The levels which are to be kept are specified in new namelist record in the namelist wps file amp mod_levs press pa 201300 200100 100000 95000 90000 85000 80000 75000 70000 65000 60000 55000 50000 45000 40000 35000 30000 25000 20000 15000 10000 5000 1000 Within the amp mod_levs namelist record the variable press_pa is used to specify a list of levels to keep the specified levels should match values of x1v1 in the intermediate format files see the discussion of the WPS intermediate format for more information on WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 23 the fields of the intermediate files The mod_levs program takes two command line arguments as its input The first argument is the name of the intermediate file
283. the flag mp_zero_out_thresh are set to zero No conservation For WRF NMM mp_zero_out MUST BE set to 0 gwd_opt Gravity wave drag option use with grid spacing gt 10 km 0 Off default 1 ARW GWD on 2 NMM GWD on sst_update Option to use time varying SST seaice vegetation fraction and abledo during a model simulation set before running real_nmm exe 0 Off default 1 real_nmm exe will create wrflowinp_d01 file at the same time interval as the available input data To use it in wrf exe add auxinput4_inname wrflowinp_d lt domain gt and auxinput4_interval under the amp time_control namelist section sas_pgcon 0 55 convectively forced pressure gradient factor SAS schemes 14 and 84 gfs_alpha boundary depth factor for GFS PBL scheme 3 var_ric Placeholder for the use of variable critical Richardson number Ric in GFS PBL scheme will be available in HWRF V3 5a release Default var_ric 0 to use constant Ric else set var_ric 1 to use variable coef_ric_l 0 16 Placeholder for the coefficient used in the calculation of the variable critical Richardson number Ric in GFS PBL scheme coef_ric_s 0 25 Placeholder for the coefficient used in the calculation of the variable critical Richardson WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 36 Variable Names Value Example Description number Ric in GFS PBL scheme sas_mass_ flux 0 5
284. the one in Version 3 0 New in Version 3 1 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM j Milbrandt Yau Double Moment 7 class scheme 9 This scheme includes separate categories for hail and graupel with double moment cloud rain ice snow graupel and hail New in Version 3 2 k Morrison double moment scheme 10 Double moment ice snow rain and graupel for cloud resolving simulations New in Version 3 0 1 Stony Brook University Y Lin scheme 13 This is a 5 class scheme with riming intensity predicted to account for mixed phase processes New in Version 3 3 m WRE Double Moment 5 class scheme 14 This scheme has double moment rain Cloud and CCN for warm processes but is otherwise like WSMS5 New in Version 3 1 n WRF Double Moment 6 class scheme 16 This scheme has double moment rain Cloud and CCN for warm processes but is otherwise like WSM6 New in Version 3 1 o NSSL 2 moment scheme 17 18 This is a two moment scheme for cloud droplets rain drops ice crystals snow graupel and hail It also predicts average graupel particle density which allows graupel to span the range from frozen drops to low density graupel There is an additional option to predict cloud condensation nuclei CCN option 18 concentration intended for idealized simulations The scheme is intended for cloud resolving simulations dx lt 2km in research applications New in Version 3 4 p CAM V5 1 2 moment 5 class scheme
285. the parent domain geo_nmm d0I1 nc and one higher resolution output file for nest level one geo_nmm_unest l01 nc If however two telescopic nests are defined nest inside the parent and nest 2 inside nest 1 then two additional static files will be created Even if an additional nest 3 was added at the same grid spacing as nest or at the same grid spacing as nest 2 there would still be only two additional static files created For example Grid 1 parent Nest 1 Nest 2 Grid 1 parent Nest 1 Nest 3 Nest 2 Grid 1 parent WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 13 will create an output file for the parent domain geo_nmm d01 nc one output file with three times higher resolution for nest level one geo_nmm_nest l01 nc and one output file with nine times higher resolution for nest level two geo_nmm_nest l02 nc In order to specify an additional nest level a number of variables in the namelist wps file must be given lists of values with a format of one value per nest separated by commas The variables that need a list of values for nesting include parent_id parent_grid_ratio i_parent_start j_parent_start s_we e_we S_sn e_sn and geog_data_res In the namelist wps the first change to the share namelist record is to the max_dom variable which must be set to the total number of nests in the simulation including the coarsest domain Having determined the number of nests all of the other affected namelist variable
286. tive Approach to Nonhydrostatic Modeling Mon Wea Rev 129 1164 1178 Janjic Z I T L Black E Rogers H Chuang and G DiMego 2003 The NCEP Nonhydrostatic Meso Model NMM and First Experiences with Its Applications EGS EGU AGU Joint Assembly Nice France 6 11 April Janjic Z I T L Black E Rogers H Chuang and G DiMego 2003 The NCEP Nonhydrostatic Mesoscale Forecasting Model 12 1 Extended Abstract 10th Conference on Mesoscale Processes Portland OR American Meteorological Society Available Online Kain J S and J M Fritsch 1990 A One Dimensional Entraining Detraining Plume Model and Its Application in Convective Parameterization J Atmos Sci 47 No 23 pp 2784 2802 Kain J S and J M Fritsch 1993 Convective parameterization for mesoscale models The Kain Fritcsh scheme the representation of cumulus convection in numerical models K A Emanuel and D J Raymond Eds Amer Meteor Soc 246 pp Kain J S 2004 The Kain Fritsch Convective Parameterization An Update Journal of Applied Meteorology 43 No 1 pp 170 181 Kessler E 1969 On the distribution and continuity of water substance in atmospheric circulation Meteor Monogr 32 Amer Meteor Soc 84 pp Lacis A A and J E Hansen 1974 A parameterization for the absorption of solar radiation in the earth s atmosphere J Atmos Sci 31 118 133 Lin Y L R D Farley and H D Orville 1983 Bulk parameter
287. to be defined Note that any vertical coordinate may still be used if defining a 3D grid of trajectories If no diagnostic quantities along the trajectories are desired the PST is left blank except that the first three lines comprising the PST banner are retained If diagnostic quantities are desired they can be requested in the PST although no plots will be produced by these specifications since you are running RIP in trajectory calculation mode Since no plots are produced only a minimum of information is necessary in the PST In most cases only the feld keyword needs to be set For some fields other keywords that affect the calculation of the field should be set such as strm rfst crag crbg shrd grad gdir qgsm smcp and addf Keywords that only affect how and where the field is plotted can be omitted Any of the diagnostic quantities listed in Appendix B of the full RIP User s Guide can be calculated along trajectories with the exception of the Sawyer Eliassen diagnostics Each desired diagnostic quantity should be specified in its own FSG i e only one feld setting between each line of repeated equal signs The only exception to this is if you are using the addf keyword In that case all of the plot specification lines PSLs corresponding to the fields being added or subtracted should be in one FSG WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 44 Once the input file is set up RIP is run as outlined in the Running RIP section Since
288. to operate on and the second argument is the name of the output file to be written Removing all but a specified subset of levels from meteorological data sets is particularly useful for example when one data set is to be used for the model initial conditions and a second data set is to be used for the lateral boundary conditions This can be done by providing the initial conditions data set at the first time period to be interpolated by metgrid and the boundary conditions data set for all other times If the both data sets have the same number of vertical levels then no work needs to be done however when these two data sets have a different number of levels it will be necessary at a minimum to remove m n levels where m gt n and m and n are the number of levels in each of the two data sets from the data set with m levels The necessity of having the same number of vertical levels in all files is due to a limitation in real which requires a constant number of vertical levels to interpolate from The mod_levs utility is something of a temporary solution to the problem of accommodating two or more data sets with differing numbers of vertical levels Should a user choose to use mod_levs it should be noted that although the vertical locations of the levels need not match between data sets all data sets should have a surface level of data and when running real_nmm exe and wrf exe the value of p_ top must be chosen to be below the low
289. token stating that this variable is associated with a specified stream 1 through 9 instead of the default 0 A single variable may be associated with multiple streams Once any digit is used with the i or h tokens the default 0 stream must be explicitly stated For example lt IO gt entry i and lt IO gt entry i0 are the same However lt IO gt entry h1 outputs the field to the first auxiliary stream but does not output the field to the default history stream The lt IO gt entry h01 outputs the field to both the default history stream and the first auxiliary stream WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 6 9 Nesting support for the model is also handled by the lt IO gt column The letters that are parsed for nesting are u up as in feedback up d down as in downscale from coarse to fine grid f forcing how the lateral boundaries are processed and s smoothing As with other entries the best coarse of action is to find a field nearly identical to the one that you are inserting into the Registry file and copy that line The user needs to make the determination whether or not it is reasonable to smooth the field in the area of the coarse grid where the fine grid feeds back to the coarse grid Variables that are defined over land and water non masked are usually smoothed The lateral boundary forcing is primarily for dynamics variables and is ignored in this overview For non masked fields such as wind temperature pressure the downwar
290. tory calculation and plotting utility RIP deals with trajectories in two separate steps each of which requires a separate execution of the program a Trajectory calculation The first step is trajectory calculation which is controlled exclusively through the namelist No plots are generated in a trajectory calculation run In order to run RIP in trajectory calculation mode the variable itrajcalc must be set to in the amp userin namelist All other variables in the amp userin part of the namelist are ignored The amp trajcalc part of the namelist contains all the information necessary to set up the trajectory calculation run The following is a description of the variables that need to be set in the amp trajcalc section Variable Name Description rtim The release time in forecast hours for the trajectories ctim The completion time in forecast hours for the trajectories Note If rtim lt ctim trajectories are forward If rtim gt ctim trajectories are backward dtfile The time increment in seconds between data files dttraj The time step in seconds for trajectory calculation WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 43 vetraj The vertical coordinate of values specified for zktraj s zktraj values are model vertical level indices p zktraj values are pressure values in mb z zktraj values are height values in km m zktraj values are temperature values in C t
291. tween each line of repeated equal signs The only exception to this is if you are using the addf keyword In that case all of the plot specification lines PSLs corresponding to the fields being added or subtracted should be in one FSG Once the user input file is set up RIP is run as outlined in the Running RIP section Since no plots are generated when RIP is run in Vis5D mode no rip execution name cgm file is WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 47 created However a file is created with the name rip execution name v5d This file is the VisSD data set which can be used by the Vis5D program to interactively display your model data set The map projection information will automatically be generated by RIP and be included in the Vis5D data set Therefore you don t have to explicitly request feld map in the PST However there are some complications with converting the map background as specified in RIP to the map background parameters required by Vis5D Currently RIP can only make the conversion for Lambert conformal maps and even that conversion does not produce an exact duplication of the correct map background Vis5D also has its own terrain data base for producing a colored terrain relief map background you don t need to specifically request feld ter to get this However if you want to look at the actual model terrain as a contour or color filled field you should add feld ter to your PST WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 7 48
292. ud resolving scales as proposed by Arakawa et al 2004 New in Version 3 5 1 Old Kain Fritsch scheme Deep convection scheme using a mass flux approach with downdrafts and CAPE removal time scale 99 This scheme has been preliminarily tested for WRF NMM Summary of Cumulus Parameterization Options cu_physics Scheme Reference aoe 1 Kain Fritsch Kain 2004 JAM 2000 2 Betts Miller Janjic Janjic 1994 MWR 2000 JAS 2002 3 Grell Devenyi Grell and Devenyi 2002 GRL 2002 4 Old SAS Pan and Wu 1995 Hong and Pan 1998 Pan 2010 2003 5 Grell 3 2008 6 Tiedtke Tiedtke 1989 MWR Zhang et al 2011 2011 submitted 7 Zhang McFarlane Zhang and McFarlane 1995 AO 2011 14 New SAS Han and Pan 2011 2011 Simplified 2005 A Arakawa Schubert Manand Pam HOi 2011 93 Grell Devenyi Grell and Devenyi 2002 GRL 2002 99 Old Kain Fritsch Kain and Fritsch 1990 JAS 1993 Meteo 2000 Monogr cu_physics Scheme Cores Moisture Momentum Shallow aiti Tendencies Tendencies Convection WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 18 sa arw lt 7 Aw a pe arw arw o our aew Shallow convection option shcu_physics a ishallow 1 shallow convection option on Works together with Grell 3D scheme cu_physics 5 will move to shcu_physics category in the future b UW Bretherton and Park scheme 2 Shallow cumulus option from CESM climate model with momentum transport New in Version 3 3 c GRIMS Global Regiona
293. uth_north west_east HGT V FieldType 104 HGT V MemoryOrder XY HGT V units meters MSL HGT V description Topography height HGT V stagger V HGT V sr x 1 HGT V sr y 1 float SOILTEMP Time south_north west_east SOILTEMP FieldType 104 SOILTEMP MemoryOrder XY SOILTEMP units Kelvin SOILTEMP description Annual mean deep soil temperature SOILTEMP stagger M SOILTEMP sr x 1 SOILTEMP sr y 1 3 float SOILCTOP Time soil _ cat south_north west_east SOILCTOP FieldType 104 SOILCTOP MemoryOrder XYZ SOILCTOP units category SOILCTOP description 16 category top layer soil type SOILCTOP stagger M SOILCTOP sr x 1 SOILCTOP sr_y 1 float SOILCBOT Time soil _ cat south_north west_east SOILCBOT FieldType 104 SOILCBOT MemoryOrder XYZ SOILCBOT units category SOILCBOT description 16 category top layer soil type SOILCBOT stagger M SOILCBOT sr x 1 SOILCBOT sr y I float ALBEDO12M Time month south_north west_east ALBEDO12M FieldType 104 ALBEDO12M MemoryOrder XYZ ALBEDO12M units percent ALBEDO12M description Monthly surface albedo ALBEDO12M stagger M ALBEDO12M sr x 1 ALBEDO12M sr y 1 float GREENFRAC Time month south_north west_east GREENFRAC FieldType 104 GREENFRAC MemoryOrder
294. w When set to 0 it turns off snow effect in sf_surface_physics 1 Other dynamics options a euler_adv Logical switch that turns on off highly conservative passive advection Default euler_adv true Note ONLY compatible with Ferrier MP 5 else set to false codamp Divergence damping weighting factor larger more damping Default codamp 6 4 coac Horizontal diffusion weighting factor larger more diffusion Default coac 1 6 slophc Maximum model level slope dZ dy for which horizontal diffusion is applied Larger values applies horizontal diffusion over more mountainous terrain Default slophc 6 363961e 3 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 21 e wp Off centering weight in the updating of nonhyrostatic epsilon term in the nonhydrostatic solver Very high resolution runs sub 1 5 km scale particularly if model layers near the top of atmosphere are thick will benefit from wp of about 0 10 0 15 as an absolute upper limit to stabilize the integration Default wp 0 00 f vortex_tracker Vortex tracking algorithm for HWRF Default vortex_tracker 1 g movemin Frequency with which nest tracker routine will be called in HWRF multiples of nphs Default movemin 10 h nomove_freq To prevent noise in the output files disable nest movement at initialization time or multiples of this interval if this interval is set to a positive number hours By default this is disabled nomove_freq 1 Operational Configuratio
295. w in Version 3 5 Urban Surface sf_urban_physics replacing old switch ucmcall a Urban canopy model 1 3 category UCM option with surface effects for roofs walls and streets WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 13 b BEP 2 Building Environment Parameterization Multi layer urban canopy model that allows for buildings higher than the lowest model levels Only works with Noah LSM and Boulac and MYJ PBL options New in Version 3 1 c BEM 3 Building Energy Model Adds to BEP building energy budget with heating and cooling systems Works with same options as BEP New in Version 3 2 Lake Physics sf_lake_physics a CLM 4 5 lake model 1 The lake scheme was obtained from the Community Land Model version 4 5 Oleson et al 2013 with some modifications by Gu et al 2013 It is a one dimensional mass and energy balance scheme with 20 25 model layers including up to 5 snow layers on the lake ice 10 water layers and 10 soil layers on the lake bottom The lake scheme is used with actual lake points and lake depth derived from the WPS and it also can be used with user defined lake points and lake depth in WRF lake_min_elev and lakedepth_default The lake scheme is independent of a land surface scheme and therefore can be used with any land surface scheme embedded in WRF The lake scheme developments and evaluations were included in Subin et al 2012 and Gu et al 2013 Subin et al 2012 Improved lake model for climate simulat
296. w to configure and compile WRF for the NMM core see Chapter 2 Note Running a real data case requires first successfully running the WRF Preprocessing System WPS See Chapter 2 for directions for installing the WPS and Chapter 3 for a description of the WPS and how to run the package Running wrf exe Note Running wrf exe requires a successful run of real_nmm exe as explained in Chapter 4 1 If the working directory used to run wrf exe is different than the one used to run real_nmm exe make sure wrfinput_d01 and wrfbdy_d01 as well as the files listed above in the real_nmm exe discussion are in your working directory you may link the files to this directory 2 The command issued to run wrf exe in the working directory will depend on the operating system On LINUX MPI systems the command is DM parallel build or Serial build mpirun np n wrf exe wrf exe gt amp wrf out where n defines the number of processors to use For batch jobs on some IBM systems such as NCAR s IBM the command is mpirun lsf wrf exe and for interactive runs Interactive MPI job is not an option on NCAR IBMs the command is mpirun lsf wrf exe rmpool 1 procs n where n stands for the number of processors CPUs to be used Checking wrf exe output A successful run of wrf exe will produce output files with the following naming convention WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 42 wrfout_d01_yyyy mm dd_hh mm ss Fo
297. when necessary When multiple path prefixes are given and the same meteorological field is available from more than one of the sources data from the last specified source will take priority over all preceding sources Thus data sources may be prioritized by the order in which the sources are given As an example of this capability if surface fields are given in one data source and upper air data are given in another the values assigned to the fg_name variable may look something like metgrid fg_ name data ungribbed SFC data ungribbed UPPER AIR To simplify the process of extracting fields from GRIB files the prefix namelist variable in the sungrib record may be employed This variable allows the user to control the names of and paths to the intermediate files that are created by ungrib The utility of WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 3 17 this namelist variable is most easily illustrated by way of an example Suppose we wish to work with the North American Regional Reanalysis NARR data set which is split into separate GRIB files for 3 dimensional atmospheric data surface data and fixed field data We may begin by linking all of the 3D GRIB files using the 1ink_grib csh script and by linking the NARR Vtable to the filename vt able Then we may suitably edit the sungrib namelist record before running ungrib exe so that the resulting intermediate files have an appropriate prefix amp ungrib out_format WPS prefix
298. with MYJ and UW PBL 14 New GFS SAS from YSU ARW only 84 Simplified Arakawa Schubert scheme Well tested used operationally at NCEP for HWRF 93 Grell Devenyi ensemble scheme 99 Previous Kain Fritsch scheme Preliminarily tested for WRF NMM mommix 0 7 momentum mixing coefficient used in SAS cumulus scheme This flag is for the SAS scheme only h_diff 0 1 Horizontal diffusion coefficient This flag is only for the HWREF configuration sfenth 1 0 Enthalpy flux factor This flag is for the GFDL surface scheme only ncnve max_dom 10 This flag is only for WRF NMM core Number of fundamental time steps between calls to convection Note that ncnvc should be set equal to nphs isfflx heat and moisture fluxes from the surface for real data cases and when a PBL is used only works with sf sfclay physics 1 5 7 or 11 WRF NMM V3 User s Guide 5 34 Variable Names Value Example Description 1 fluxes are on 0 fluxes are off It also controls surface fluxes when diff_opt 2 andkm_opt 3 anda PBL isn t used 0 constant fluxes defined by tke_drag_coefficient and tke_heat_flux l use model computed u and heat and moisture fluxes 2 use model computed u and specified heat flux by tke_heat_flux ifsnow Snow cover effects for Thermal Diffusion scheme sf_surface_physics 1 0 No snow cover effect 1 With snow cover effec
299. zing convection combining ensemble and data assimilation techniques Geophys Res Lett 29 14 Article 1693 Hong S Y J Dudhia and S H Chen 2004 A Revised Approach to Ice Microphysical Processes for the Bulk Parameterization of Clouds and Precipitation Mon Wea Rev 132 103 120 Hong S Y H M H Juang and Q Zhao 1998 Implementation of prognostic cloud scheme for a regional spectral model Mon Wea Rev 126 2621 2639 Hong S Y and H L Pan 1996 Nonlocal boundary layer vertical diffusion in a medium range forecast model Mon Wea Rev 124 2322 2339 Janjic Z I 1979 Forward backward scheme modified to prevent two grid interval noise and its application in sigma coordinate models Contributions to Atmospheric Physics 52 69 84 Janjic Z I 1984 Non linear advection schemes and energy cascade on semi staggered grids Mon Wea Rev 112 1234 1245 Janjic Z I 1990 The step mountain coordinates physical package Mon Wea Rev 118 1429 1443 Janjic Z I 1994 The step mountain eta coordinate model further developments of the convection viscous sublayer and turbulence closure schemes Mon Wea Rev 122 927 945 Janjic Z I 1996a The Mellor Yamada level 2 5 scheme in the NCEP Eta Model 11th Conference on Numerical Weather Prediction Norfolk VA 19 23 August 1996 American Meteorological Society Boston MA 333 334 Janjic Z I 1996b The Surface Layer in the NCEP Eta Model

WRF-NMM User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents